JP2021164546A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that enhances the game interest by a performance.SOLUTION: After multiple performance displays are displayed in grayscale display colors being special colors due to a monochrome change in a color change performance, return to normal colors is started radially at the center position of the screen display. By expanding the range of return to normal colors so as to gradually increase from a part of the screen display to the enter screen, the special colors are returned to the normal colors. In addition, a performance image showing a character is displayed as a special image, the special colors may be returned to the normal colors with an effect display or a method of increasing the recovery range. The display color to be the normal colors may be returned to the normal colors from the special colors with color-blend, with respect to the grayscale display colors due to the change in monochrome.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, it has been proposed that a monochrome advance notice effect indicating whether or not the advance notice effect changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and a black and white mode effect in which the background image is monochrome can be executed. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-2224

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, the production becomes monotonous and there is room for improvement in improving the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of gaming by directing.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display. Then, a special effect executing means (for example, steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a color change effect) for changing a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time from a normal color to a common special color is executed. A CPU 77AK131 or the like and a specific effect executing means (for example, step 06AKS13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a color recovery effect) for changing the plurality of effect displays changed to the special color by the special effect to the normal color. CPU77AK131 to execute) and
In the specific effect, all of the plurality of effect displays may be gradually changed to the normal color. Here, the fact that the normal color can be changed may be the case of, for example, the production execution examples 06AK21 to 06AK23.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of various circuits mounted on an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of an effect control command. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a story notice. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold display data storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color change effect is not executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the monochrome change is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the golden system change is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a battle zone production decision process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision example of the notice during the change of all symbols and the notice after the reach is established. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production execution example at the time of starting a battle zone production. It is a figure which shows the control example of the timing. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example corresponding to the variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a color change composition processing. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the swing effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the swing effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the swing effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example in which hold display and active display are performed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example which makes a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example which makes a game effect lamp emit light, and the light emission priority. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the setting example and the determination example about a swing effect. It is a figure which shows the control example about a color change effect and a swing effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color recovery effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color recovery effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color recovery effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color recovery effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the color recovery effect and the message display color notice are executed together. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of a color recovery pattern. It is a figure which shows the decision example at the time of deciding the type of a color recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the color recovery pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the color recovery pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the control example about a color recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the re-change effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example about the transformation example when the color change effect is started.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like is provided to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of an outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
While the variable display is being executed, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio. For example, the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be any process that can determine the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be executable at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of any of the reach symbols. The reach symbol is the same decorative symbol that is consistently stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R among the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss and the final stop symbol at the time of big hit.

In the stop symbol determination process, it is sufficient that the reach symbol can be determined by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for the reach symbol determination. .. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the highest, and the numbers 6 and 5 are used. As the number 4 becomes the number 3 and the number 2 becomes, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state decreases, and it corresponds to the number 1. Even if the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is set so that the variable display result when the decorative symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. good. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect. Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. At this time, if it is determined that "with effect", the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The set value may be specified by using the stored data in such a predetermined area.

When executing the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion pattern is determined. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. As a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 may be provided. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns may differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot game state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

In the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control is performed to execute the change effect during the change effect period. The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not motivated, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. In this way, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (such as the effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may give a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature parts 77AK to 79AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 77AK100, the input circuit 77AK121, the memory controller 77AK122, the effect data memory 77AK123, the ROM77AK124, the RAM 77AK125, and the watchdog timer 77AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU 77AK131, a VDP77AK132, an audio processing circuit 77AK133, a lamp control circuit 77AK134, a motor control circuit 77AK135, and a built-in memory 77AK136. The VDP77AK132 includes a data transfer circuit 77AK141, a preloader 77AK142, a graphics decoder 7AK143, a drawing circuit 77AK144, a VRAM 77AK145, and a display drive circuit 77AK146. The voice processing circuit 77AK133 includes a voice decoder 77AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. It is possible to control the execution of the effect using a part or all of the plurality of effect devices such as the LED for the effect and the movable member for the effect such as the movable body 32. The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 may be configured as an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of effects are integrated on one chip. The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU 77AK131, VDP77AK132, and a built-in memory 77AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 77AK133, the lamp control circuit 77AK134, and the motor control circuit 77AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 77AK100. Alternatively, a part or all of the input circuit 77AK121, the memory controller 77AK122, the effect data memory 77AK123, the ROM77AK124, the RAM77AK125, and the watchdog timer 77AK126 may be provided inside the one-chip effect control microprocessor 77AK100.

The input circuit 77AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 77AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 77AK 122 executes various processes including a read process and a write process for the stored data of the effect data memory 77AK 123 in response to a request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 77AK 100. The effect data memory 77AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 77AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. If sprite image data is prepared as the still image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. good. These sprite image data can be used as character image data. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 77AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. The still image data includes plane still image data capable of generating a still image corresponding to a two-dimensional plane and stereoscopic image data capable of generating a stereoscopic image which is a still image corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space. May be good.

In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 77AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 77AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 77AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 77AK123 may be configured to include a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, even a non-volatile semiconductor memory is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 77AK 124 constitutes a program memory for storing a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The ROM 77AK 124 may have the same configuration and functions as the ROM 121. The RAM 77AK 125 is configured by using, for example, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) or the like, and provides a work area to the CPU 77AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100. Further, the RAM 77AK 125 provides a storage area in which the data read from the effect data memory 77AK 123 can be temporarily stored. The RAM 77AK 125 may have the same configuration and functions as the RAM 122. The watchdog timer 77AK126 forcibly resets the CPU 77AK131 and restarts the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 when the program in the CPU 77AK131 goes into a runaway state.

In addition to the computer program for effect control, the ROM 77AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 77AK 124, a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 77AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns are configured. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is list data in which a series of commands to be executed by VDP77AK132 are described according to the order of drawing processing and the like. The display list may include a command group for display control, a command group for voice control, a command group for lamp control, and a command group for motor control in a mixed manner. Alternatively, while the display list includes a command group for display control, a part or all of the command group for voice control, the command group for lamp control, and the command group for motor control are included. , It may be included in a command list or list data different from the display list. The VDP77AK132 may be able to control the electrical components for production in cooperation with each other by using a display list, another command list, or a data list. The RAM 77AK 125 may temporarily store programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production.

The CPU77AK131 executes the control process according to the computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 77AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the electric component for the effect according to the program read from the ROM 77AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 77AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 77AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 77AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 77AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 77AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 77AK 125. Variable data read processing for reading the variable data of May be good. The CPU 77AK 131 may have the same configuration and functions as the effect control CPU 120.

The VDP77AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display list from the CPU77AK131, the register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP77AK 132 controls to execute variable display of a decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining a switching timing of an effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP77AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP77AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The VDP77AK132 may have the same configuration and functions as the VDP included in the display control unit 123.

The data transfer circuit 77AK141 can control various data transmission / reception by the VDP77AK132. The data transmission / reception by the VDP77AK132 may include data transmission / reception with the internal circuit of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 and data transmission / reception with the external device of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100. The internal circuit of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 capable of controlling data transmission / reception by the data transfer circuit 77AK141 may include, for example, the built-in memory 77AK136, VRAM77AK145, or one or both of them. The external device of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 whose data transmission / reception can be controlled by the data transfer circuit 77AK 141 may include, for example, the effect data memory 77AK123, the RAM 77AK125, or one or both of them.

The preloader 77AK 142 can analyze the display list, read the referenced image data from the effect data memory 77AK 123, and transfer it to the external RAM 77AK 125 or the internal VRAM 77AK 145. When such a transfer is performed, the preloader 77AK142 outputs a display list in which the reference destination of the image data is rewritten to the address after the transfer. Since random access to the effect data memory 77AK123 occurs during execution of the drawing process by the drawing circuit 77AK144, the performance is large when the image data is directly referred to from the effect data memory 77AK123, which is vulnerable to random access such as a NAND flash memory. descend. Therefore, the preloader 77AK142 can execute drawing processing at high speed by transferring the image data and the display list to the external RAM 77AK 125 or the internal VRAM 77AK 145 in advance.

Of the image data read from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, the graphics decoder 77AK143 inputs moving image data, separates it into video data and audio data, and then decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data. And output. The video data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 is supplied to the drawing circuit 77AK144. The audio data separated from the moving image data is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The graphics decoder 77AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the drawing circuit 77AK144.

The drawing circuit 77AK144 can read the display list and execute the drawing process according to the order in which the command group is described. The drawing circuit 77AK144 may be configured to include, for example, a display list analysis unit, a geometry pipeline, a triangle rasterizer, a texture sampler, a frame buffer sampler, a pixel generation unit, and the like. The display list analysis unit analyzes the drawing command of the display list. Geometry pipelines perform vertex coordinate transformations and lighting operations. The triangle rasterizer generates a source address and a destination address when executing the triangle drawing process. The texture sampler samples the texture and performs bilinear filtering. The frame buffer sampler acquires a frame buffer and a Z buffer used for inter-pixel calculation. The pixel generation unit executes image processing such as alpha blending to generate pixel data to be written in the frame buffer.

The drawing commands described in the display list are control commands, index table control commands, environment setting commands, texture setting commands, interpixel calculation commands, special commands, primitive drawing commands, texture load commands, and tertiary commands. It suffices if it can be classified as an original drawing command. Control system commands are a group of commands that control drawing. The index table control system command is a group of commands for controlling and managing the index table. The index table is set corresponding to a plurality of index spaces constructed in the storage area of VRAM77AK145, and the indexes allocated to each index space can be managed. Environment setting commands are a group of commands for setting the execution environment of drawing processing. The texture setting command is a group of commands for setting a texture. The inter-pixel operation command is a group of commands for controlling the operation between pixels. A special command is a group of commands for special control. Primitive drawing commands are a group of commands for controlling drawing processing using a flat image. The texture load type commands are a group of commands for controlling the texture load to the VRAM 77AK145. The three-dimensional drawing system command is a group of commands for controlling the drawing process using a stereoscopic image.

The VRAM 77AK145 is a data memory capable of reading or writing data by a part or all of the data transfer circuit 77AK141, the graphics decoder 77AK143, the drawing circuit 77AK144, and the display drive circuit 77AK146. The VRAM 77AK 145 can store video data that has been decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143. Further, the VRAM 77AK145 can store palette data used for drawing processing by the drawing circuit 77AK144. The VRAM77AK145 can set a frame buffer and a Z buffer used for drawing processing. In addition, the VRAM 77AK145 can store a display list for drawing, compression-encoded lamp drive data, and the like. A plurality of spaces for storing data can be constructed in the VRAM 77AK 145. These spaces are index spaces. The data transfer circuit 77AK141, the graphics decoder 77AK143, the drawing circuit 77AK144, and the display drive circuit 77AK146 may be capable of reading or writing data by designating an index space.

The plurality of index spaces may be secured as any of an arbitrary area, a page area, and an active area control area, respectively. An index space can be secured in an arbitrary area of VRAM77AK145 by setting a start address and a horizontal size for the arbitrary area. For example, in the arbitrary area, the index space may be secured by specifying the base point address in the VRAM 77AK145 in units of 2048 bits and the horizontal size of the two-dimensional space in units of 256 bits. For the page area, for example, horizontal 4096 and vertical 128 lines are unit spaces, and an index space can be secured by a multiple of the unit space. For image data stored in an arbitrary area or page area, the index number to be accessed can be set when a drawing command that writes parameters to the index table or a drawing command that acquires parameters from the index table is executed. can. In the active area control area, the start address and horizontal size can be automatically set to secure the index space. In the active area control area, the start address and the horizontal size can be automatically set when the drawing command for transferring the texture data to the VRAM77AK145 is executed. Index numbers are automatically assigned in the active area control area.

For example, the display frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer are less likely to change dynamically once they are set, so it is suitable to provide them in an arbitrary area. On the other hand, the size of the drawing frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer may change dynamically. Therefore, when the frequency of dynamic changes is high, it is suitable to provide it in the page area. On the other hand, when the size is the same over a plurality of frames, it is suitable to provide it in an arbitrary area. Palette data, moving image data without inter-frame reference, or video data decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143 need only be guaranteed to exist in the VRAM 77AK145, so that active area control is easy to control. It is suitable to store in the area. Moving image data with inter-frame references is suitable for storage in an arbitrary area (when it is difficult to change) and in a page area, depending on the degree to which the size changes dynamically. There are cases (when it is easy to change).

A frame buffer such as a display frame buffer or a drawing frame buffer provides a virtual drawing space in which display data of an effect image created by drawing processing by VDP77AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is based on vector-format image data (vector data, vector data) composed of primitives such as polygons including points, lines, and triangles, and the drawing circuit 77AK144. Any image data (pixel data, raster data) in the bitmap format created by the above may be used. A drawing area can be set in the virtual drawing space of the frame buffer, and by setting the base point coordinates and the diagonal point coordinates in the virtual drawing space, clipping is performed in the drawing area that is the target range to be actually drawn.

The display drive circuit 77AK146 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 77AK146 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 77AK132. do it.

The voice processing circuit 77AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP77AK132, compression-coded voice data, and the like. The audio data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 of the VDP77AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The voice decoder 77AK151 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be included in, for example, the effect data memory 77AK123 or an external ROM 77AK124. The voice processing circuit 77AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory in response to a command or register setting from the CPU 77AK131 or VDP77AK132.

The lamp control circuit 77AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 77AK134 may be output to the lamp control board 14 or the lamp driver board by decompressing and decoding the lamp drive data in response to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP77AK132. The motor control circuit 77AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 77AK135 may generate motor control data in response to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP77AK132, and output the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 77AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 77AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example AKP0, a small symbol display area AKA1 serving as a first interface display area and a variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as a second interface display area are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The variable display compatible display area AKA2 includes an active display unit AKB0, a first hold display unit AKB1, and a second hold display unit AKB2.

In the active display unit AKB0, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display unit AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the number of the first hold storages. In the second hold display unit AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, the active display unit AKB0, the first hold display unit AKB1, and the second hold display unit AKB2 can perform active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display. The hold display in the first hold display unit AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display". The hold display in the second hold display unit AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

For example, the first hold display unit AKB1 can perform hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. The second hold display unit AKB2 can perform hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display unit AKB0, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) by the first hold display unit AKB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) by the second hold display unit AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed on the active display unit AKB0 may be any one that has the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. In the active display unit AKB0, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area AKA1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area AKA1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right side on the screen of the image display device 5. There is. In the small symbol display area AKA1, the variable display of the small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. Since the small symbol is displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1 in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the display content and display result of the small symbol from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area AKA1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect display by the background image is performed according to the background image data prepared in advance. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped. In this embodiment, as a normal color, control is performed to variably display or stop the decorative pattern whose display color is red.

FIG. 10-3 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a start opening winning command for the feature units 77AK to 79AK. In the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start prize is set based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the start area. Be told. As an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start prize, a start port prize designation command is prepared in advance. Further, in the start winning determination process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for specifying the number of pending storages is made. A hold storage number notification command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for specifying the hold storage number. Further, in the start winning determination process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for specifying a determination result of the look-ahead determination is made. As an effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment, a winning judgment result command is prepared in advance.

FIG. 10-3 (A) shows a setting example of a start opening winning designation command, a hold storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. The start opening winning designation command includes a command B100H which is a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200H which is a second starting opening winning designation command. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The hold storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH which is a first hold storage number notification command and a command C2XXH which is a second hold storage number notification command. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. The winning determination result command may be the command C4XXXH including a value set according to the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting area at the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. The first start condition is satisfied when it is determined that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (first special figure game) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the first start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the first reserved storage number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting area at the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , The second start condition is satisfied when it is determined that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. The second start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game (second special figure game) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the main board 11 transmits the second start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the second reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first start opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. The establishment of the first starting condition is due to the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting area. The establishment of the second starting condition is due to the fact that the game ball has passed through the second starting area. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the first start area. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command that notifies that the game ball has passed through the second start area. The winning judgment result command is a comparison using a game random number (random number value for determining a special figure display result, etc.) extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like when the first start condition is satisfied or when the second start condition is satisfied. The result (determination result at the time of winning) is notified to the side of the effect control board 12. The first hold storage number notification command notifies the first hold storage number. The second hold storage number notification command notifies the second hold storage number.

FIG. 10-3 (B) illustrates the content of the notification by the winning determination result command. Of the winning judgment result commands, the command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot judgment range, and the display result of the special figure game is displayed. By being determined as "missing", the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is not controlled is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and is controlled to the jackpot game state by determining the display result of the special figure game as "big hit". Notifies the result of the winning judgment (variable display content is "big hit"). The command C400H notifies that the determination at the time of winning is restricted. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the judgment result at the time of winning (variable display content is determined to be the fluctuation pattern with super reach at the time of loss). "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss") is notified. On the other hand, the command C403H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable) that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect is determined at the time of loss. The displayed content notifies "Reach confirmed when lost"). Further, the command C404H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, and it is possible that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect is not determined. Notify the time judgment result (variable display content is "general when lost"). In this way, the winning judgment result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" or whether or not it is determined in a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning.

When the winning determination result is "general at the time of loss", the variable display of the decorative symbol may be in the reach mode when notified. Even in this case, the reach effect of the super reach is not executed, and the judgment value to be compared with the random value for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern in the variation pattern determination table so that the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. Just do it. The reach confirmation range at the time of loss compared with the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode even when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (such as "3"). It is set so that it will be decided. Therefore, when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, for example, when the number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number, the decorative symbol is variably displayed at a predetermined ratio. May be determined by the variation pattern that is the reach mode. In this way, when the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, the fluctuation pattern in the reach mode executes the reach effect of the normal reach while super reach. Any variation pattern that does not execute the reach effect of is sufficient. In such a setting, the winning judgment result of "general at the time of loss" is that the reach effect of the normal reach is executed even when the variable display of the decorative symbol is non-reach or the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. Notify that it will be done.

FIG. 10-4 shows an execution example of the step-up notice regarding the feature portions 77AK to 79AK. A step-up notice is included in the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the step-up notice, the effect mode of the advance notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, changes stepwise. The effect mode that changes in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The operation of the movable member including, or a combination of a part or all of them may be included. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the square-shaped outer frame of the predetermined display color during the variable display of the decorative pattern. By the effect display in which the display contents (display mode) of the above are displayed in a switchable manner in a predetermined order, the effect operation is performed so that the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages to step up. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer frame partial image showing a display frame and an inner frame partial image used for switching display in a step change. The partial image in the frame may be a still image that is still displayed at each stage of the step change, or may be a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each stage of the step change.

When the step-up notice is executed, the maximum number of steps is determined to be one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of steps in which the effect mode can be changed from the start to the end of the step-up notice. The maximum number of steps is not limited to "1" to "4", and may be any number of steps based on an arbitrary design. FIG. 10-4 (A) shows an execution example AKC1 that displays an effect image of the first step corresponding to the number of steps "1" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the first stage. FIG. 10-4 (B) shows an execution example AKC2 for displaying the effect image of the second step corresponding to the number of steps "2" when the change of the effect mode in the step-up notice is the second stage. FIG. 10-4 (C) shows an execution example AKC3 that displays an effect image of the third step corresponding to the number of steps “3” when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the third stage. FIG. 10-4 (D) shows an execution example AKC4 for displaying the effect image of the fourth step corresponding to the number of steps “4” when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the fourth stage.

In the execution example AKC1, the outer frame partial image having a blue display color is displayed and the frame inner partial image of the first step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first step in the step-up notice. When the maximum number of steps is "1", the step-up notice ends only in the execution example AKC1. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "2" or more, the display of the execution example AKC1 is switched to the display of the execution example AKC2. In the execution example AKC2, the outer frame partial image having a green display color is displayed and the frame inner partial image of the second step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps “2” of the second step in the step-up notice. When the maximum number of steps is "2", the step-up notice ends after the execution example AKC2. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "3" or more, the display of the execution example AKC2 is switched to the display of the execution example AKC3. In the execution example AKC3, the outer frame partial image having a red display color is displayed and the frame inner partial image of the third step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps “3” of the third step in the step-up notice. When the maximum number of steps is "3", the step-up notice ends after the execution example AKC3. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "4", the display of the execution example AKC3 is switched to the display of the execution example AKC4. In the execution example AKC4, the outer frame partial image whose display color is gold is displayed and the frame inner partial image of the fourth step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps “4” of the fourth step in the step-up notice.

When the step-up notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the step-up notice is not executed. Further, among the cases where the step-up notice is executed, when the maximum number of steps in the step-up notice is large, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the maximum number of steps in the step-up notice is small. In this way, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" may differ depending on whether or not the step-up notice is executed and the effect mode in the step-up notice.

FIG. 10-5 shows an execution example of the story notice regarding the feature portions 77AK to 79AK. A story notice is included in the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the story notice, the effect mode of the advance notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, changes continuously with the passage of time. It suffices that a series of stories progresses in the story notice due to such continuous changes in the production mode. The story notice is included in the full-screen notice production. The full-screen notice effect is a notice effect that covers the entire screen by displaying an effect image for advance notice on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of variable display or the like. By displaying such an effect image for advance notice, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern. The effect of displaying the effect image for advance notice may include a blackout effect of displaying a covered image such as a blackout image. The covered image may be an image having a predetermined color or pattern, such as an image in a light emitting mode or an image in a freeze mode, or an image in which the display mode of the decorative pattern becomes invisible. The full-screen notice effect may be a panel display format step-up notice, cut-in notice, mini-game notice, development notice, or the like. It is a notice effect displayed on a part of the display screen, and at least a notice effect that makes it invisible such as the decorative pattern cannot be seen at all, and a notice effect that makes it difficult to see such that the display screen and the decorative pattern can be seen through. It may be.

When the story notice is executed, it is determined to be one of a plurality of story notice patterns depending on the content of the progress of the series of stories. It suffices that the production mode of the story notice is different according to the plurality of story notice patterns. In the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect image of the execution example AKD 11 is displayed first regardless of the plurality of story notice patterns. After that, the production image of the execution example AKD 21 may be displayed or the production image of the execution example AKD 22 may be displayed according to the plurality of story notice patterns. After the production image of the execution example AKD21 is displayed, the production image of the execution example AKD31 is displayed according to a plurality of story notice patterns, the production image of the execution example AKD32 is displayed, and the execution example. The production image of AKD33 may be displayed. After the effect image of the execution example AKD 22 is displayed, the effect image of the execution example AKD 32 may be displayed or the effect image of the execution example AKD 33 may be displayed according to a plurality of story notice patterns. After the production image of the execution example AKD31 is displayed, the production image of the execution example AKD41 is displayed according to a plurality of story notice patterns, the production image of the execution example AKD42 is displayed, and the execution example. There are cases where the effect image of AKD43 is displayed and cases where the effect image of execution example AKD44 is displayed. After the production image of the execution example AKD32 is displayed, the production image of the execution example AKD42 is displayed according to a plurality of story notice patterns, the production image of the execution example AKD43 is displayed, and the execution example. The production image of AKD44 may be displayed. After the effect image of the execution example AKD33 is displayed, the effect image of the execution example AKD43 may be displayed or the effect image of the execution example AKD44 may be displayed according to the plurality of story notice patterns.

When the story notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the story notice is not executed. Further, among the cases where the story notice is executed, when the effect image of the execution example AKD44 is displayed, the jackpot expectation is the highest, and when the effect image of the execution example AKD43 is displayed, the execution example AKD44 The jackpot expectation is lower than when the effect image is displayed, and when the effect image of Execution Example AKD42 is displayed, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the effect image of Execution Example AKD43 is displayed. When the effect image of Example AKD 41 is displayed, the expectation of big hit is lower than that when the effect image of Execution Example AKD 42 is displayed. In this way, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" may differ depending on whether or not the story notice is executed and the production mode in the story notice. The story notice may be executed by the reproduction display of the moving image, or may be executed by the animation display of the still image.

In the command analysis process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved storage number notification command are received together with the first starting port winning designation command, RAM77AK125 or Among the free areas in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, which is provided in the predetermined area of the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit), the first start is performed in the storage area having the smallest hold display number as the buffer number. The mouth winning designation command, the winning judgment result command, and the first hold storage number notification command are stored in order. Further, in the command analysis process, when the winning determination result command and the second reserved storage number notification command are received together with the second start opening winning designation command, a predetermined area of the RAM 77AK125 or the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit). Among the free areas in the second start winning command buffer provided in the above, the second start opening winning designation command, the winning judgment result command, and the second hold are placed in the storage area having the smallest hold display number, which is the buffer number. The memory number notification commands are stored in order. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, one set of effect control commands (first start opening winning designation command, winning judgment result command, first reserved storage number notification) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first starting winning A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. The CPU77AK131 receives the effect control command received when the first start winning is generated, according to the reception order, in a free area in the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. Store in order from the beginning of. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to the first hold storage number. In the second start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (second starting opening winning designation command, winning judgment result command, second reserved memory number notification) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second starting winning. A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. The CPU77AK131 receives the effect control command received when the second start winning is generated, according to the reception order, in the free area in the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. Store in order from the beginning of. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning corresponds to the second hold storage number.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the hold display data storage unit AKM1. The hold display data storage unit AKM1 may be provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 77AK 125 or the internal memory 77AK 136. The hold display data storage unit AKM1 has a first hold display unit AKB1 corresponding to the fact that the execution of the first special figure game is suspended and the execution of the second special figure game is suspended. 1 Various data for performing the hold display and various data for performing the second hold display on the second hold display unit AKB2 are stored as hold display data. As the hold display data storage unit AKM1, a first hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the first special figure game and a second hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the second special figure game are used. It suffices if it is provided. In the hold display data storage unit AKM1, for example, in association with the hold numbers in the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2, a storage for storing data indicating a winning determination result and a hold display image so as to be identifiable. The area is secured. The hold display data storage unit AKM1 uses a part or all of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning (for example, the storage area of the judgment result command at the time of winning), or the first start winning command. It may be configured as a storage unit separate from the buffer and the second start winning command buffer.

The winning determination result that can be stored by the hold display data indicates the determination result of the look-ahead determination specified based on the winning determination result command. The winning judgment result specified based on the winning judgment result command includes "big hit", "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", "reach confirmation at the time of loss", and "general at the time of loss". When the winning judgment result of "big hit" is notified by the winning judgment result command, it is specified that the display result of the variable display which is the judgment target is set as "big hit". When any of "Loss time super reach confirmation", "Loss time reach confirmation", and "Loss time general" is notified by the winning judgment result command, the display result of the variable display that is the judgment target is "Loss". Is specified. The hold display image that can be stored by the hold display data is displayed on the first hold display section AKB1 and the second hold display section AKB2, so that the presence / absence of a special figure game that has not yet been started and the number of holds can be recognized. It is a production image.

The notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include a hold display notice and an active display notice. As an example of the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display notice is at least one of the first hold displays in the first hold display unit AKB1 or at least one of the second hold displays in the second hold display unit AKB2. By changing the display mode to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, it is announced that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and will be controlled to the big hit game state. Due to the hold display notice, the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is changed to a specific color (for example, blue, green, red, gold, etc.) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. By making it possible to recognize the change in the display mode of the hold display, it is sufficient to suggest that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio. Alternatively, by changing the display pattern in the hold display to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry blossom pattern) different from the predetermined pattern (for example, plain) in the normal time, the expectation that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" is normal. It may be possible to suggest that it is higher than. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "chance", "heat", "extreme heat", etc.) as the hold display, the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" is increased. It may be possible to suggest that there is. The change in the hold display in the hold display notice is also referred to as "change in hold display".

The active display notice changes the active display on the active display unit AKB0 to a display mode different from the normal display mode, so that the start condition is satisfied and the variable display during execution becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined rate and becomes a big hit. Foretell that it will be controlled to the game state. When the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution is changed by the active display notice, the display color, display pattern, presence / absence and content of the message, etc. are normally changed as in the case of the hold display notice. It would be good if it could be changed to something different from. The change in the active display in the active display notice is also referred to as "active display change". The display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the hold display that can be changed by the hold display notice. The display mode of the hold display that can be changed by the hold display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice.

10-6 (B1) to (B5) show a plurality of effect images that can be used for hold display and active display. In this embodiment, five display images AKE0 to AKE4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for hold display and active display. The quantity of display images that can be used for hold display and active display is not limited to five, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image AKE0 is an effect image when a round plain white display is performed. The display image AKE1 is an effect image when a round plain blue display is performed. The display image AKE2 is an effect image when a round plain green display is performed. The display image AKE3 is an effect image when a round solid color is displayed in red. The display image AKE4 is an effect image when a round plain gold display is performed. The normal display mode in the hold display and the active display is a round plain white display. When the display color of the hold display or the active display is gold, the jackpot expectation is the highest. When the display color of the hold display or the active display is red, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the display color is gold. When the display color of the hold display or the active display is green, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the display color is red. When the display color of the hold display or the active display is blue, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the display color is green. The display color of the hold display or the active display is white in the normal state, and in this case, the jackpot expectation is the lowest.

In the feature units 77AK to 79AK, the color change effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the starting areas provided in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The color change effect is a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the start area to the end timing of the color change to a common color. The color change end timing may be, for example, the timing at which the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode in the variable display in which the target changes. In this embodiment, the color change effect executes a monochrome change that changes a plurality of effect displays to a grayscale display color, and a golden color change that changes a plurality of effect displays to a golden display color. Including cases and. Whether or not to execute the color change effect and whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden system change can be determined at different ratios according to the winning judgment result indicated by the winning judgment result command. In the color change effect, when changing the normal color of a plurality of effect displays to a grayscale display color, and when changing the normal color of a plurality of effect displays to a golden display color, , Both can be said to be monochrome changes in that multi-gradation single-color images expressed in single colors with different brightness are displayed. However, in the following embodiment, the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a grayscale display color is referred to as a monochrome change, and the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a golden display color is referred to as a golden system change. , Each color change effect will be explained separately.

In the feature units 77AK to 79AK, a battle zone effect can be executed as a specific effect different from the special effect. It is suggested that the battle zone effect is controlled to the jackpot game state by displaying an effect image different from the normal time prepared in advance based on the winning determination result corresponding to the hold display. The battle zone effect is, for example, a specific effect in which the execution is started in response to the start of the variable display and the effect mode corresponds to the battle zone in the period until the end timing of the battle zone. The end timing of the battle zone may be any timing corresponding to the derivation display of the display result in the variable display in which the target fluctuates. Whether or not to execute the battle zone effect can be determined at different ratios according to the winning determination result stored in the hold display data storage unit AKM1.

FIG. 10-7 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In this look-ahead notice setting process, it is determined whether or not a command at the time of winning the start opening has been received (step AKS001). The start opening winning command includes a starting opening winning designation command, a hold storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step AKS001, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning judgment result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By doing so, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of starting winning. At this time, if there is no command reception (step AKS001; No), the read-ahead notice setting process ends.

If a command is received (step AKS001; Yes), the content of the notification by the received command is specified (step AKS002). For example, the winning judgment result is specified as the content of the notification by the winning judgment result command. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a color change restriction (step 77AKS01). In step 77AKS01, it is determined that there is a color change restriction when a predetermined restriction condition for the color change effect is satisfied. The restriction condition of the color change effect is satisfied, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed. In addition, the restriction condition of the color change effect may be satisfied when the notification content by the winning determination result command is in the winning determination restriction. The restriction condition of the color change effect includes the winning judgment result different from the "general at the time of loss" in the winning judgment result stored in the hold display data storage unit AKM1 before the current winning judgment result. If so, it may be established. The restriction condition of the color change effect is satisfied when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or when the reach effect of the super reach is executed in response to the variable display being executed. You may. The restriction condition of the color change effect may be satisfied when the execution of the color change effect has already started.

When there is no color change restriction (step 77AKS01; No), the color change effect is determined (step 77AKS02). The decision of the color change effect includes a decision of whether or not to execute the color change effect and a decision of whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden system change when the color change effect is executed. Just do it. In step 77AKS02, since the execution of the color change effect can be determined when the start opening winning command is received, the color change effect can be executed from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the start area. At this time, either "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change in the color change effect, or "golden system change" that executes the golden system change in the color change effect. Will be decided. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 77AKS02 is "no change" (step 77AKS03).

If the decision result of the color change effect is "monochrome change" or "golden system change" and not "no change" (step 77AKS03; No), the final stop symbol is the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not the derivation display of is in progress (step 77AKS04). When the derivation display of the final stop symbol is in progress (step 77AKS04; Yes), the standby setting for the color change effect is performed (step 77AKS05). In step 77AKS05, for example, the color change standby flag may be set to the ON state. The color change standby flag may be provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136.

When the derivation display of the final stop symbol is not in progress (step 77AKS04; No), control is performed to start execution of the color change effect (step 77AKS06). In step 77AKS06, the control process for starting the execution of the color change effect is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132. When the color change effect is executed, the effect image in the effect display is generated by using the same image data as in the case where the normal color is not changed. On the other hand, when the color change effect is executed, the color in the effect display is changed by performing a drawing process different from the case where the normal color is not changed. The drawing process including the case of executing the color change effect is executed by VDP77AK132 based on the drawing command from CPU77AK131. When the execution of the color change effect is started, the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in the predetermined color change start notification period. The control of step 77AKS06 may include a control of displaying an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect on the screen of the image display device 5 by a drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132. The effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be displayed with priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice. As a result, the start notification effect for notifying the start of the color change effect may be executed with priority over the predetermined advance notice effect.

Following step 77AKS06, audio output continuous control is performed (step 77AKS07). In step 77AKS07, when the color change effect is executed, the control process for continuously executing the effect by the voice common to that before the execution is performed. When the execution of the color change effect is started, the sound notifying the start of the color change effect may be output in the predetermined color change start sound output period. In this case, after the end of the color change start voice output period, it may be controlled so that the same voice effect as before the color change effect is executed is resumed. Even in this way, it is possible to execute a common sound effect before and after the color change start sound output period. The sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the control of step 77AKS07 is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is common to the case where the color change effect is not executed. It becomes feasible in the production mode of. In this way, from the start of the execution of the color change effect to the end of the color change start audio output period and the end of the execution of the color change effect, the effect is the same as the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It suffices if the audio effect can be executed in the mode.

When there is a color change restriction in step 77AKS01 (step 77AKS01; Yes), or when there is no change in step 77AKS03 (step 77AKS03; Yes), after executing the setting of step 77AKS05 and the control of step 77AKS07, After setting the update of the hold display at the time of the start winning (step AKS003), the read-ahead notice setting process ends. When the first hold storage number is increased by 1 due to the passing of the game ball through the first start winning opening, the first hold display is displayed by adding a new first hold display in the first hold display unit AKB1. It may be increased by 1. When the second hold storage number is increased by 1 due to the passing of the game ball through the second start winning opening, the second hold display is displayed by adding a new second hold display in the second hold display unit AKB2. It may be increased by 1. The display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display may be determined to be any of the display images AKE0 to AKE4 to be the hold display images at a predetermined ratio according to the winning determination result. At the beginning of the free area in the hold display data storage unit AKM1, the winning judgment result specified from the winning judgment result command and the holding display data indicating the holding display image determined in step AKS003 are stored. Just let me do it.

FIG. 10-7 (B) shows a determination example AKG01 of the color change effect. In step 77AKS02 of the read-ahead notice setting process, for example, the presence or absence of a color change effect is determined at a rate according to the winning determination result. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a color change effect is extracted, and a color change effect determination table stored in advance in ROM77AK124 or the like is referred to. As a result, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not to execute the color change effect, and whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden system change when the color change effect is executed. Determining example of color change effect In AKG01, "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, or "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change and "gold system change" that executes the golden system change when the color change effect is executed. It is decided to be one of. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", the determination rate of "no change" is 80%, the determination rate of "monochrome change" is 20%, and the determination rate of "golden system change". The decision rate is 0%. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "no change" is 40%, the decision rate of "monochrome change" is 58%, and the decision rate of "golden change" is It is 2%. If the winning determination result is other than the above, the determination rate of "no change" is 100%, and it is determined that the color change effect is not always executed. With such a setting, when the color change effect is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the color change effect is not executed. Further, when the color change effect is executed, the ratio of the super reach reach effect being executed is higher than that when the color change effect is not executed. As a color change effect, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state differs depending on whether the monochrome change is executed or the golden system change is executed. When the golden system change is executed as the color change effect, it is confirmed that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state. It is possible to suggest that the color change effect controls the jackpot game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's attention to the execution of the color change effect and improve the game interest.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when it is determined in step 77AKS01 that there is a color change restriction, step 77AKS02 is not executed, so it is not determined to execute the color change effect. Since the restriction condition of the color change effect is satisfied within the range where the battle zone effect is being executed, there is a limit that the color change effect is not executed in this range. This limits the execution of the color change effect after the execution of the battle zone effect is started. In step 77AKS01, when the execution of the color change effect has already started, it may be determined that there is a color change limit regardless of whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change. , It may be determined that there is a color limitation only when the color change effect is a golden color change. If the golden color change in the color change effect has already been executed, it is determined that there is a color change limit and the new color change effect is restricted so that it is not executed, so that the color change effect that becomes the golden color change is canceled. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the problem and appropriately improve the game entertainment. Since it is a color change effect with high expectation of a big hit, such as it is confirmed that the golden system change in the color change effect is controlled to the big hit game state, by limiting the new color change effect from being executed, it is possible to prevent the new color change effect from being executed. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of being in the jackpot game state from being impaired. If the monochrome change in the color change effect has already been executed, the decision is made in step 77AKS02, and the color change effect is changed from the monochrome change to the golden system based on the determination of the "gold system change" for executing the golden system change. Control may be performed to change to. On the other hand, when the determination by 77AKS02 is not "golden system change", control may be performed to continuously execute the monochrome change in the color change effect that has already been executed. In this way, if it is possible to execute a golden system change having a relatively high expectation of a big hit after the execution of a monochrome change having a relatively low expectation of a big hit is started among a plurality of types of color change effects. Since the player's expectation for the jackpot game state is gradually increased, the player's attention to the execution content of the color change effect can be increased, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, step 77AKS06 is not executed, so that the execution of the color change effect is not started. There is a limit as a limit that the color change effect is not executed within the range during the derivation display of the final stop symbol. If it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, the execution of the color change effect can be started in response to the start of the next variable display.

FIG. 10-8 shows an effect execution example when the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 77AKH01 shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". During the change of all the fluctuating symbols, the effect image corresponding to the number of steps "1" of the step-up notice is displayed. In the production execution example 77AKH01, a voice production in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R is also executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this start winning, it is determined in step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process that there is no change in the color change effect.

Based on the determination result in step 77AKS02, in the effect execution example 77AKH02 shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), each effect display is continued or progresses while the colors in the plurality of effect displays are normal. For example, an effect image corresponding to the number of steps "2" of the step-up notice is displayed. This effect image includes an outer frame partial image whose display color is green. In addition, the background image is displayed in normal colors. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern whose display color is red is displayed as the normal color. In the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area, the effect display corresponding to the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display is performed in the normal colors. In the production execution example 77AKH02, a voice production in which the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R is also executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH03 shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the small symbol has also ended, and the confirmed small symbol is derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a normal color as in the production execution examples 77AKH01 and 77AKH02. The display color of the stopped-displayed decorative pattern is displayed in red as the normal color. Also in the variable display compatible display area AKA2, the effect display corresponding to the hold display and the active display is performed in the normal color. In the production execution example 77AKH03, a voice production in which the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R is also executed.

FIG. 10-9 shows an example of effect execution when a monochrome change is executed among the color change effects. In the effect execution example 77AKH11 shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), as in the effect execution example 77AKH01, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the step-up notice, and the display of the background image are executed, and the corresponding effect display is performed. ing. Further, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect for outputting the sound of the music phrase PH01 is also executed as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this start winning, in step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined to be "monochrome change" in which the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect.

Based on the determination result in step 77AKS02, in the effect execution example 77AKH12 shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), the colors in the plurality of effect displays are changed to the common grayscale display color. Gray scale display colors have a common color attribute in that, for example, in the HSL (Hue Saturation Lightness) color space and the HSV (Hue Saturation Value) color space, the saturation is 0% achromatic. .. The method for specifying the color attribute is not limited to the HSL color space or the HSV color space, and the Munsell color system including the Munsell color system, the Munsell color system, the XYZ color system, and L * a. It may be any color system such as * b * color system. In any color space or color system, a plurality of effect displays may be changed to a common color by changing monochrome. For example, the background image is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the case of monochrome change, the color of the small symbol display area AKA1 serving as the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area may be maintained unchanged. In this case, the display mode of the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, for example, by changing the shape in response to a monochrome change.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect is displayed with priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect, for example, the effect image displayed in the step-up notice. , The effect control may be performed with the start of the color change effect. In the effect execution example 77AKH12, even when the step-up notice is executed as in the effect execution example 77AKH02, the effect image for notifying the message "Monochrome time start !!" is displayed in preference to the step-up notice. The effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. The effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. With such a display, when the color change effect is started, it is possible to hide the scene where the display color is changed and suppress a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display color. When the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be interrupted by canceling the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. After the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is interrupted in this way, when the display of the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is erased, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is continuously advanced from the time of cancellation. Execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be resumed. Alternatively, the execution of the interrupted predetermined advance notice effect may be terminated as it is. In addition, when an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is displayed by advancing the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect on the back side (back side) of this display. The display of the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be prioritized. In this way, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect that is advanced on the back side may be completely invisible or partly visible by displaying the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect. You may. When an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is reduced and advanced as compared with the case where the effect image is not displayed, so that the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is larger than the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. , The display of the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be prioritized. When an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is advanced with higher transparency than in the case where the effect image is not displayed, so that the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is higher than the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. , The display of the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be prioritized. In addition, when an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, an arbitrary display control that lowers the visibility of the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is performed as compared with the case where the effect image is not displayed. The display of the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be prioritized over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. The predetermined advance notice effect may be any advance notice effect in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the color change effect. In step 77AKS01 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the restriction condition of the color change effect is satisfied when the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a "big hit" or when the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Therefore, the predetermined advance notice effect that is being executed when the execution of the color change effect is started may be a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit. When an effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect has priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect that has a lower expectation of a big hit than the color change effect. Is displayed, the player's expectation for being in a big hit game state can be appropriately raised, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In step 77AKS07 of the read-ahead notice setting process, control is performed to continue the audio output. As a result, in the effect execution example 77AKH12, the sound effect of outputting the sound of the music phrase PH02 by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AKH02. Therefore, the sound effect can be executed in a common sound output mode regardless of whether the color is a normal color without the color change effect being executed or the color is changed by the color change effect being executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH13 shown in FIG. 10-9 (D), the definite decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the small symbol has also ended, and the confirmed small symbol is derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a grayscale display color following the effect execution example 77AKH12. The stop-displayed decorative pattern is also displayed in a grayscale display color, following the effect execution example 77AKH12. In the small symbol display area AKA1 and the variable display compatible display area AKA2, the effect display corresponding to the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display is performed in the normal colors. In the effect execution example 77AKH13, as in the effect execution example 77AKH03, the sound effect of outputting the sound of the music phrase PH03 by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Also in this case, the sound effect is executed in the common sound output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without the color change effect being executed or the color is changed by the color change effect being executed. Can be done.

FIG. 10-10 shows an example of effect execution when the golden system change is executed among the color change effects. In the effect execution example 77AKH21 shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), as in the effect execution example 77AKH01, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the step-up notice, and the display of the background image are executed, and the corresponding effect display is performed. ing. Further, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect for outputting the sound of the music phrase PH01 is also executed as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this start winning, in step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined to be "golden system change" for executing the golden system change in the color change effect.

Based on the determination result in step 77AKS02, in the effect execution example 77AKH22 shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the colors in the plurality of effect displays change to a common golden display color. The golden display color has a common color attribute in that, for example, in the HSL color space and the HSV color space, the hue is within the range of 51 ° ± 5% in the 360 ° notation. The method for specifying the color attribute may be the same as in the case of monochrome change. Further, the common color attribute may have a single value of hue (for example, only 51 °), or the hue may be within a predetermined range in a wider range. By making the saturation and the lightness different within the range in which the hue is common, it is sufficient that the player can recognize the commonality with the case where the hue change effect is not executed in each effect display. For example, the background image has a golden display color different from the normal color, and the background image common to the case where the color change effect is not executed is displayed due to the difference in saturation and brightness in each pixel. , The player becomes recognizable. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display color is a golden color different from the normal color, and the same decorative pattern as when the color change effect is not executed is displayed due to the difference in saturation and brightness in each pixel. Can be recognized by the player. In the case of a change in gold color, the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area are also changed to a gold color display color different from the normal color. You just have to change. In step 77AKS02, it is possible to determine "golden system change" only when the winning determination result is "big hit", so that when the golden system change is executed, it is controlled to the big hit game state. Determine. Therefore, even if the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display are changed to a golden display color different from the normal color, the display result of the variable display will eventually become a "big hit" and will be controlled to the big hit game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort due to a change in the display color. In the case of a change in gold color, the display mode of the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, for example, by changing the shape in response to the change in gold color system.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, the effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect is displayed with priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect, for example, the effect image displayed in the step-up notice. , The effect control may be performed with the start of the color change effect. In the effect execution example 77AKH22, even when the step-up notice is executed as in the effect execution example 77AKH02, the effect image for notifying the message "Gold time start !!" is displayed in preference to the step-up notice. The effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a gold-based display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the gold-based display color. The effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. With such a display, when the color change effect is started, it is possible to hide the scene where the display color is changed and suppress a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display color.

In step 77AK07 of the read-ahead notice setting process, control is performed to continue the audio output. As a result, in the effect execution example 77AKH22, as in the effect execution example 77AKH02, the sound effect of outputting the sound of the music phrase PH02 by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Therefore, the sound effect can be executed in a common sound output mode regardless of whether the color is a normal color without the color change effect being executed or the color is changed by the color change effect being executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH23 shown in FIG. 10-10 (D), the definite decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the small symbol has also ended, and the confirmed small symbol is derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a golden display color following the effect execution example 77AKH22. The stop-displayed decorative pattern is also displayed in a golden display color, following the effect execution example 77AKH22. In the small symbol display area AKA1 and the variable display compatible display area AKA2, following the effect execution example 77AKH22, the effect display corresponding to the small symbol, the hold display, and the active display is performed in the golden display color. In the effect execution example 77AKH23, as in the effect execution example 77AKH03, the sound effect of outputting the sound of the music phrase PH03 by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Also in this case, the sound effect is executed in the common sound output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without the color change effect being executed or the color is changed by the color change effect being executed. Can be done.

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In this variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is determined (step AKS011). If the CPU 77AK131 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. good. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the reduced working hours state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", different (mismatched) decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In this case, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined to be a decorative symbol different from the left and right fixed decorative symbols. Will be done. When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the same decoration pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" ( The decorative symbol (matching) is determined as the final stop symbol. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is used as the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then during the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of. When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is decided that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the one to be the final decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it may be decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. .. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognizablely notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect, it is sufficient to determine the combination of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After determining the final stop symbol or the like in step AKS011, it is determined whether or not there is a standby setting for the color change effect (step 77AKS41). In step 77AKS41, for example, when the color change standby flag is on, it may be determined that there is a standby setting for the color change effect. If there is a standby setting for the color change effect (step 77AKS41; Yes), the setting for starting the execution of the color change effect is made (step 77AKS42). In step 77AKS42, the execution of the color change effect is started as the variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the same control process as in step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). I just need to be able to do it. The standby setting of the color change effect is a step of the pre-reading notice setting process as long as the final stop symbol is derived and displayed when it is decided to execute the color change effect based on the occurrence of the start prize. Performed by 77AKS05. In this case, step 77AKS42 is set to start the execution of the color change effect, so that the execution of the color change effect can be started when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In this way, the color changes based on the passing of the game ball through the start area during the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, such as when the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the execution of the effect is decided, the execution of the color change effect is started after the stop display period ends.

Further, in step 77AKS42, when the color change effect is executed by the same control process as in step 77AKS07 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the same voice as before the execution is used. The production may be continuously executable. Therefore, the sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not executed. It will be possible. In the period from the start of execution of the color change effect to the end of the execution of the color change effect after the end of the color change start audio output period, the effect mode is the same as the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It suffices if the voice effect can be executed.

When there is no standby setting for the color change effect (step 77AKS41; No), or after the setting in step 77AKS42, the battle zone effect determination process (step AKS012) and the advance notice effect determination process (step AKS013) are executed in order. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS014). For example, the CPU 77AK131 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, the CPU 77AK131 selects one of the effect control patterns (battle zone effect control patterns) prepared in advance in response to the execution setting of the battle zone effect by the battle zone effect determination process of step AKS012, and sets it as the use pattern. You may. One of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (preliminary effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a use pattern in response to the execution setting of the advance notice effect by the advance notice effect determination process of step AKS013. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the battle zone effect control pattern, and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, and one effect control corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect. It may be the one that sets the pattern.

When the effect control pattern is determined by step AKS014, for example, the effect control provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The initial value of the process timer is set (step AKS015). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step AKS016). At this time, for example, the image display device is supplied to the VDP77AK132 with a display list or individual drawing commands specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step AKS014. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of 5.

After setting the variable start in step AKS016, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display section AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display section AKB2 corresponds to the start of the variable display. Make settings for updating etc. (step AKS017). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), the display part (display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the first hold display unit AKB1. , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold display unit AKB2. , The second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step AKS018), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-12 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the battle zone effect determination process. In the battle zone effect determination process, "1" is set as the initial value of the hold number in order to confirm the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit AKM1 (step 77AKS11). Subsequently, the determination result corresponding to the set hold number is read (step 77AKS12). In step 77AKS12, for example, in the hold display data storage unit AKM1, the data indicating the winning determination result stored corresponding to the set hold number may be read out. At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result corresponding to the hold number is not stored (step 77AKS13). If the hold display data corresponding to the set hold number is not stored, it is determined in step 77AKS13 that there is no determination result. If there is no determination result (step 77AKS13; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process ends.

If the winning determination result is stored in step 77AKS13 (step 77AKS13; No), it is determined whether or not the reading winning determination result is "general at the time of loss" (step 77AKS14). At this time, if it is "general at the time of loss" (step 77AKS14; Yes), the set hold number is added by 1 (step 77AKS15), and the process returns to step 77AKS12. In this way, in the battle zone effect processing, after the initial value "1" of the hold number is set in step 77AKS11, the hold display data storage unit AKM1 has a hold display in which the winning determination result is different from "general at the time of loss". The processes from step 77AKS12 to step 77AKS15 are repeatedly executed until the data is reached or the hold number reaches a value larger than the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

If the winning judgment result is not "general at the time of loss" in step 77AKS14 (step 77AKS14; No), it is judged whether or not the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach confirmed at the time of losing" or "big hit". (Step 77AKS16). At this time, if the winning determination result is neither "super reach confirmed at the time of loss" nor "big hit" (step 77AKS16; No), the battle zone production determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed at the time of loss" or "big hit" (step 77AKS16; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the battle zone effect. (Step 77AKS17). In step 77AKS17, it is determined to be either "no effect" in which the battle zone effect is not executed or "with effect" in which the battle zone effect is executed.

Based on the determination result in step 77AKS17, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the battle zone effect is not executed as “no effect” (step 77AKS18). In the case of "no effect" (step 77AKS18; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. If it is "with effect" instead of "without effect" (step 77AKS18; No), the battle zone effect determination process ends after the setting for starting the battle zone effect is made (step 77AKS19). In step 77AKS19, as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the first hold display of the first hold display unit AKB1 or the second hold display of the second hold display unit AKB2 corresponds to the shift timing of shift display. Then, the setting for starting the execution of the battle zone effect is made. The battle zone effect may include a telop notification effect that allows the player to recognize that the battle zone effect is different from the color change effect, for example, by displaying a telop. The telop notification effect may be executed only during the period when the battle zone effect is executed in parallel with the color change effect, or the battle zone may be executed regardless of whether or not the battle zone effect is executed in parallel with the color change effect. It may be feasible during the period in which the effect is executed.

FIG. 10-12 (B) shows a determination example AKG02 of the battle zone production. In step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process, the presence or absence of the battle zone effect is determined at a ratio according to, for example, the winning determination result read in step 77AKS12. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the battle zone effect is extracted, and a battle zone effect determination table stored in advance in ROM77AK124 or the like is referred to. As a result, it suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the battle zone effect is to be executed. Example of determining the battle zone effect In AKG02, it is determined to be either "without effect" that does not execute the battle zone effect or "with execution" that executes the battle zone effect. For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", the determination rate of "without effect" is 80%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 20%. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the determination rate of "without effect" is 40%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 60%. With such a setting, when the battle zone effect is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the battle zone effect is not executed. Further, when the battle zone effect is executed, the ratio of the super reach reach effect being executed is higher than that when the battle zone effect is not executed. It is possible to suggest that the battle zone effect controls the jackpot game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player by producing the battle zone and improve the interest of the game.

In the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), the presence or absence of the battle zone effect can be determined in step 77AKS17 regardless of whether or not the color change effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the battle zone effect after the execution of the color change effect is started. Further, if it is not "general at the time of loss" in step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, the processes after step 77AKS16 are executed to end the battle zone effect determination process. As a result, in the range in which the winning judgment result stored in the hold display data storage unit AKM1 includes the winning judgment result different from the "general at the time of loss" before the winning judgment result to be read. Since the processing after step 77AKS16 is not executed, there is a limit that the battle zone effect is not executed. On the other hand, the restriction condition of the color change effect may be satisfied when the winning judgment result different from the "general at the time of loss" is included before the winning judgment result this time. Therefore, the battle zone effect can execute the variable display common to the color change effect as a suggestion target.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS013 of the variable display start setting process as the notice effect determination process. In the notice effect determination process, as the determination of the notice during all symbol changes, the presence or absence of the notice during all symbol changes as to whether or not to execute the notice during all symbol changes, the type of notice when executing the notice during all symbol changes, and Is determined (step 77AKS31). The notice during all symbol changes is a notice effect that can be executed during all symbol changes in which the decorative symbols change in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It may include a character display notice corresponding to the notice type of "character notice", a step-up notice corresponding to the notice type of "step-up notice", and a story notice corresponding to the notice type of "story notice". The character display notice is displayed so that an effect image showing a specific character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The character display notice is a character such as character type, number of displays, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passing speed, other movements, dialogue, or a combination of some or all of them. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on an arbitrary effect mode by displaying the effect image indicating. The step-up notice may be a notice effect as shown in the execution example shown in FIG. 10-4. The story notice may be a notice effect as shown in the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5. In step 77AKS31, it is determined to be either "no notice" in which the notice is not executed while all the symbols are changing, or "character notice", "step-up notice", or "story notice" in the case of executing the notice effect. The CPU77AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice during all symbol changes, and based on the random number value, refers to the advance notice determination table during all symbol changes according to the variable display content, thereby determining the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the advance notice type. Should be decided.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS31, it is determined whether or not the determination is made "without notice" (step 77AKS32). If any of the notice types is determined instead of "no notice" (step 77AKS32; No), the notice effect pattern during all symbol changes is determined (step 77AKS33). The notice effect pattern during all symbol changes is an effect pattern in which the execution timing, effect mode, etc. of the notice during change of all symbols can be specified, and if a plurality of patterns are stored in a predetermined area of ROM77AK124 in advance and prepared. good. The CPU77AK131 selects a notice effect pattern determination table during all symbol changes according to the notice type, extracts a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern during all symbol changes, and responds to variable display contents and the like based on the random number value. Then, the advance notice effect pattern during all symbol changes may be determined by referring to the selected table for determining the advance notice effect pattern during change of all symbols.

When "no notice" is given in step 77AKS32 (step 77AKS32; Yes), or after the determination by step 77AKS33, it is determined whether or not the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34). If the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; Yes), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. When the variable display content is other than "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; No), it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35). When the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display this time is the target variation of the color change effect (step 77AKS36). The target variation of the color change effect is a variable display in which it is determined to execute the color change effect based on the judgment result at the time of winning, and the variable display is a target that suggests that the color change effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is a display.

If it is not the target change of the color change effect (step 77AKS36; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If the color change effect is not being executed in step 77AKS35 (step 77AKS35; No), or if the target change of the color change effect is in step 77AKS36 (step 77AKS36; Yes), the advance notice is executed after the reach is established. Whether or not there is a notice after the reach is established and the type of notice when the notice is executed after the reach is established are determined (step 77AKS37). The notice after the reach is established is a notice effect that can be executed after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode. For example, the message display color notice corresponding to the notice type of the "display color notice" and the "group display" It suffices to include a group display notice corresponding to the notice type of "notice" and a movable body movement notice corresponding to the notice type of "movable body movement notice". The message display color notice is an effect display in which the display color of the character image for notifying the message that the reach establishment can be recognized is different. The message display color notice may be executed so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display color of the character image. In the group display notice, an effect display is performed such that an effect image group showing a large number of the same or similar characters passes on the screen of the image display device 5. The group display notice is a group of effect images showing the character type, number of displays, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passing speed, a combination of some or all of them, and others. It may be executed so that the jackpot reliability is different depending on an arbitrary effect mode by the display of. In the movable body operation notice, an effect including the operation of the movable body 32 is executed. The movable body notice depends on the operating distance, operating speed, number of operating times, operating direction, number of operating objects, a combination of some or all of these, and any other mode of effect by the operation of the movable body 32. Therefore, the jackpot reliability may be different. In step 77AKS37, it is determined to be one of "no notice" in which the notice is not executed after the reach is established, or "display color notice", "group display notice", and "movable body operation notice" in the case of executing the notice effect. The CPU77AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice after the reach is established, and based on the random number value, determines the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the advance notice type by referring to the advance notice determination table after the reach is established according to the variable display result. do it.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS37, it is determined whether or not the determination is made "without notice" (step 77AKS38). If "no notice" is set (step 77AKS38; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If it is determined to be one of the advance notice types instead of "no advance notice" (step 77AKS38; No), the advance notice effect pattern is determined after the reach is established (step 77AKS39), and then the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. The post-reach advance notice effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the execution timing and the effect mode of the post-reach advance notice can be specified, and a plurality of patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 77AK 124 in advance. The CPU77AK131 selects a notice effect pattern determination table after the reach is established according to the advance notice type, extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice effect pattern after the reach is established, and based on the random number value, according to a variable display result or the like. By referring to the selected post-reach advance notice effect pattern determination table, the post-reach advance notice effect pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10-14 (A) shows a determination example AKG11 of the notice during all symbol changes. In step 77AKS31 of the advance notice effect determination process, the presence / absence of the advance notice during all the symbol changes and the advance notice type are determined at a ratio according to the variable display content. At this time, when the notice during all symbol changes is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed. In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher when the step-up notice is executed than when the character display notice is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the story notice is executed than when the step-up notice is executed.

FIG. 10-14 (B) shows a decision example AKG12 of the notice after the reach is established. In step 77AKS37 of the advance notice effect determination process, the presence / absence of advance notice and the advance notice type after the reach is established are determined at a ratio according to the variable display result. At this time, when the advance notice is executed after the reach is established, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the notice is not executed. In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher when the group display notice is executed than when the message display color notice is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the movable body movement notice is executed than when the group display notice is executed.

In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, among the cases where it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed, when it is determined in step 77AKS36 that the target fluctuation is not performed, step 77AKS37 is performed. Since it will not be executed, it is not decided to execute the notice after the reach is established. There is a limit that the notice after the reach is established is not executed within the range until the target changes during the execution of the color change effect. As a result, it is restricted that the advance notice after the reach is established is executed in the period from the start of the execution of the color change effect to the change of the target. In the variable display in which the judgment result at the time of winning is "general at the time of loss", the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the reach effect of the normal reach may be executed. Even in this case, when it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed and it is determined in step 77AKS36 that the target fluctuation is not, it is not determined to execute the advance notice after the reach is established. Therefore, during the execution of the color change effect, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the reach is established, it is possible to restrict the advance notice from being executed after the reach is established. Since the notice after the reach is established is executed after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the effect of raising the player's expectation may be increased. If the advance notice is executed after the reach is established before the target fluctuates during the color change effect, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", which discourages the player and the player for the color change effect. There is also a risk that the reliability of the will be reduced. In addition, if the color change effect and the advance notice after the reach is established are executed at the same time, the player may be given a complicated impression. Therefore, during the execution of the color change effect, it is restricted that the advance notice after the reach is established corresponding to the variable display before the target change. This makes it possible to prevent the player's reliability of the color change effect from being impaired and to prevent the player from giving a complicated impression.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9 as the effect process during variable display. In this variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step AKS031). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that the lapse has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step AKS032). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern) determined in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the advance notice effect period (step AKS032; Yes), the control to execute the advance notice effect is performed (step AKS033).

When it is not the advance notice production period (step AKS032; No), or after the control by step AKS033, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the battle zone production (step 77AKS51). When it is decided to execute the battle zone effect in step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process, it is determined in step 77AKS51 that it is the start timing of the battle zone effect as the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Will be done. It should be noted that the timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. May be determined. When it is the start timing of the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; Yes), the control to start the execution of the battle zone effect is performed (step 77AKS52). In step 77AKS52, the control process for starting the execution of the battle zone effect is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP77AK132. When executing the battle zone effect, for example, the display of the background image is changed from the normal background image to the background image corresponding to the battle zone. Further, in the battle zone effect, for example, a specific character image may be displayed in a silhouette mode. In step 77AKS52, voice control processing is performed when the execution of the battle zone effect is started by the voice command supplied by the CPU 77AK131 to the voice processing circuit 77AK133. When executing the battle zone effect, the sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone.

When it is not the start timing of the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; No), or after the control by step 77AKS52, it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 78AKS01). When the color change effect is being produced (step 78AKS01; Yes), it is determined whether or not the end timing is determined after the reach is established corresponding to the end of the color change effect (step 78AKS02). The color change effect is an effect control pattern such that after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode in the target fluctuation, for example, before the timing when the advance notice can be executed after the reach is established, the end timing is set after the reach is established. Etc. may be set. When the end timing is reached after the reach is established (step 78AKS02; Yes), control is performed to end the execution of the color change effect (step 78AKS03). In step 78AKS03, the control process for ending the execution of the color change effect is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132. When the color change effect is finished, the color in the effect display is returned to the normal color by returning to the drawing process in which the normal color is not changed. When the execution of the color change effect is completed, an effect image for notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed in a predetermined color change effect end notification period. The control of step 78AKS03 may include a control of displaying an effect image notifying the end of the color change effect on the screen of the image display device 5 by a drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132.

If the color change effect is not in progress (step 78AKS01; No), the end timing is not established after the reach is established (step 78AKS02; No), or after the control by step 78AKS03, it is determined whether or not the reach effect period is in effect. (Step AKS035). The reach effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern (such as a special figure variation effect control pattern) determined according to the variation pattern in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the reach effect period (step AKS035; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step AKS036). When it is not the reach effect period (step AKS035; No), or after the control by step AKS036, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed. After controlling the execution of the effect during the variable display including (step AKS037), the effect process during the variable display is terminated. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern on which the color change effect is not executed, it is suggested which of the monochrome change and the golden system change is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. It may be possible to carry out the color change suggestion effect to be performed at a predetermined ratio. After the color change suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the suggested color change effect may be started, or the execution of the suggested color change effect may not be started. When the color change suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the color change suggestion effect may be started at a higher rate than when the color change suggestion effect is not executed. By executing such a color change suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation and attention to the color change effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step AKS031 (step AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS038). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step AKS038; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step AKS038; Yes), for example, by supplying a drawing command corresponding to the symbol confirmation from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP77AK132, the final display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) as a stop display (step AKS039).

Following the control by step AKS039, it is determined whether or not the battle zone production is being executed (step 78AKS11). When the battle zone effect is being produced (step 78AKS11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display this time is a variable display that is the target variation of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS12). The target fluctuation of the battle zone effect is a variable display corresponding to the judgment result at the time of winning, which is determined to execute the battle zone effect, and is a variable target that suggests that the battle zone effect controls the jackpot game state. It is a display. If the target of the battle zone effect is changed (step 78AKS12; Yes), control is performed to end the execution of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS13). In step 78AKS13, the control process for ending the execution of the battle zone effect is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132. In step 78AKS13, the execution of the battle zone effect can be terminated in response to the termination of the variable display in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed.

When the battle zone is not being produced (step 78AKS11; No), when the target of the battle zone is not changed (step 78AKS12; No), or after the control by step 78AKS13, the jackpot start designation command reception waiting time is set in advance. A predetermined fixed time is set (step AKS040). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step AKS041), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10-16 shows an example of effect execution when the battle zone effect is started. The battle zone effect is a variable display of the decorative pattern based on the determination result by step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12 (A) regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed. Becomes feasible with the start of. 10-16 (A1) to (C1) show a case where the color change effect is not executed and there is no color change effect. 10-16 (A2) to (C2), (D2), and (E2) show the case where the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. 10-16 (A3) to (C3) show the case where the golden system change is executed in the color change effect.

In the case of no color change effect, from the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as in the effect execution example 77AK201 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A1), as in the effect execution example 77AK202 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B1). With the start of variable display of various decorative patterns, the execution of the battle zone production is started. When the start timing of the battle zone effect is determined by step 77AKS51 shown in FIG. 10-15, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started by the control of step 77AKS52. In the effect execution example 77AK202, the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. In addition, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When there is no color change effect, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode includes, for example, a contour partial image showing the outline of the character CH1 and an internal specific image having a specific color inside the outline. I just need to be there. The internal partial image may be set to a specific color such as a rainbow color (rainbow color) as a normal color. In addition, a text image that notifies a message such as "battle zone entry" is displayed. When there is no color change effect, the character image for notifying the message may have a normal color such as blue. After that, in the effect execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C1), while the display of the character image for notifying the message is erased, the telop display that can recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed is started. ing.

When the execution of the battle zone effect is started as in the effect execution example 77AK202 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B1), the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is controlled by the control of step 77AKS52 shown in FIG. 10-15. The voice production using is changed from the normal voice production to the voice production corresponding to the battle zone. For example, in the normal sound production, the music phrases PH01 to PH03 are repeatedly reproduced and output. In the voice production corresponding to the battle zone, when the execution of the battle zone production such as the production execution example 77AK202 is started, the player can recognize the execution start of the battle zone production by playing and outputting the music phrase PHA1. You just have to notify. After that, when the execution of the battle zone production progresses as in the production execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C1), the music phrase PHA2 is reproduced and output, so that the music in the normal time in which the battle zone production is not executed is performed. It suffices that the sound effect can be executed in an effect mode different from the sound effect by the phrases PH01 to PH03.

When the monochrome change is being executed, the effect execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B2) is changed from the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as in the effect execution example 77AK211 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A2). With the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in, the execution of the battle zone effect is started. During the execution of the monochrome change, the screen display of the image display device 5 is displayed so that a plurality of effect displays such as a background image, a decorative pattern, and a part of a preview effect are displayed in a common color called a grayscale display color. The color has changed to a color different from the normal color. At this time, when the start timing of the battle zone effect is reached, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. In addition, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the monochrome change is being executed, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode changes to a color different from the normal color by displaying the entire effect image in, for example, a grayscale display color. The display of the character image that notifies the message such as "battle zone entry" also changes to a color different from the normal color by displaying the entire display in grayscale display color, for example. In this way, when the monochrome change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed together, the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed and the period in which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

Even when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B2), it is shown in FIG. 10-15 as in the effect execution example 77AK202. By the control of step 77AKS52, the sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even if the monochrome change is being executed, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by playing back and outputting the music phrase PHA1 as in the case where the monochrome change is not executed. Just do it.

Following the effect execution example 77AK212, in the effect execution example 77AK213 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C2), it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed while the display of the character image for notifying the message is erased. The telop display has started. When the monochrome change is being executed, the telop display may notify a message recognizable that the monochrome change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. It suffices if the parallel notification effect for notifying that the monochrome change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect can be executed by the telop display for notifying such a message. The parallel notification effect may be executed instead of the telop display, or as a sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone effect progresses during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK213, the music phrase PHA2 is reproduced and output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AK203 when the monochrome change is not executed. It suffices to enable the sound production to be executed in a production mode different from the sound production by the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time when the battle zone production is not executed. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect can be executed in the same manner as when the color change effect is not executed. Therefore, even if the monochrome change is being executed, the monochrome change is not executed. In the same production mode as in the case, the sound production for reproducing and outputting the music PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed.

In step 77AKS31 of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, it is determined that the advance notice during all symbol changes is executed at a predetermined ratio even during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In one example, it is decided to execute a step-up notice as a notice during all symbol changes. In the effect execution example 77AK214 shown in FIG. 10-16 (D2), the step-up notice is executed during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In this case, the effect display in the step-up notice changes in color due to the execution of the color change effect, and for example, the entire display is displayed in grayscale display color. In another example, it is decided to execute the story notice as a notice during the change of all symbols. In the effect execution example 77AK215 shown in FIG. 10-16 (E2), the story notice is executed during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. The effect image used in the story notice may have a size that can be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, for example. The effect display in the story notice does not change the color due to the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect, and is displayed in the same color as the normal color. In this way, during the period of executing the monochrome change in the color change effect, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed by the color corresponding to the color changed according to the color change effect, while the effect display in the story notice is changed in color. It can be executed with the same color as the period when the production is not executed.

When the golden system change is being executed, the effect execution example shown in FIG. 10-16 (B3) is changed from the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as in the effect execution example 77AK221 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A3). With the start of variable display of the decorative pattern as in 77AK222, the execution of the battle zone effect is started. During the execution of the golden system change, the screen display of the image display device 5 is displayed so that a plurality of effect displays such as a background image, a decorative pattern, a notice effect, and an interface display are displayed in a common color called a golden display color. The color in is changed to a color different from the normal color. At this time, when the start timing of the battle zone effect is reached, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. In addition, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the golden display is being executed, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode changes to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the entire character CH1 in the golden display color. .. The display of the character image that notifies the message such as "battle zone entry" also changes to a color different from the normal color by displaying the entire display in a golden display color, for example. In this way, when the golden system change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed together, the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed and the period in which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

Even when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the golden system change as in the effect execution example 77AK222 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B3), the same as in the effect execution examples 77AK202 and 77AK212, FIG. 10-15 By the control of step 77AKS52 shown in the above, the sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even if the golden system change is being executed, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by playing back and outputting the music phrase PHA1 as in the case where the golden system change is not executed. You just have to notify.

Following the effect execution example 77AK222, in the effect execution example 77AK223 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C3), it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed while the display of the character image for notifying the message is erased. The telop display has started. When the golden system change is being executed, the telop display may notify a message recognizable that the golden system change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. By the telop display for notifying such a message, it is possible to execute the parallel notification effect for notifying that the golden system change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect. The parallel notification effect may be executed instead of the telop display, or as a sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone production progresses during the execution of the golden system change as in the production execution example 77AK223, the battle zone production is executed by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA2 as in the production execution examples 77AK203 and 77AK213. It suffices to make it possible to execute the sound production in a production mode different from the sound production by the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect can be executed in the same manner as when the color change effect is not executed. Therefore, even when the golden system change is being executed, the golden system change is executed. A sound effect for reproducing and outputting the music PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed in the same effect mode as in the case of not performing.

When the step-up notice is executed as a notice during the change of all symbols during the execution of the golden system change in the color change effect, the effect display in the step-up notice changes the color due to the execution of the color change effect, for example, the whole It is displayed in a golden display color. When the story notice is executed as a notice during the change of all symbols during the execution of the golden change in the color change effect, the color of the effect display in the story notice changes due to the execution of the color change effect, for example, the whole is golden. It is displayed in the display color of. The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. In this way, during the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed by the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, and the effect display in the story notice is changed in color. It can be executed by the color changed according to the production and the corresponding color. It should be noted that the effect display in the story notice may be displayed in the same color as the normal color without changing the color due to the execution of the golden system change in the color change effect. In this case, during the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed by the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, while the effect in the story notice is executed. The display can be executed with the same color as the period during which the color change effect is not executed.

The effect display in the step-up notice effect changed according to the color change effect during the period in which the color change effect was executed, regardless of which of the monochrome change and the golden system change in the color change effect was executed. It is feasible with colors and corresponding colors. The effect display in the story notice effect can be executed with the same color as the period when the color change effect is not executed in the period when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed among the monochrome change and the golden system change in the color change effect. On the other hand, in the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, it can be executed by the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. In this way, the plurality of advance notice effects can be executed by the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color during the period in which the color change effect is executed regardless of the color changed by the color change effect. A second notice effect that can be executed by different colors may be included in the period in which the color change effect is executed according to the effect and the color changed by the color change effect. The second notice effect can be performed in the period in which the color change effect is executed according to the color changed by the color change effect, in the case where it can be executed with the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed, and in the color change effect. It suffices to have a case where the color is changed according to the color and a case where the color can be executed by the corresponding color.

FIG. 10-17 shows a control example of the timing at which the execution of the color change effect and the battle zone effect is started and the timing at which the execution is ended. The color change effect can be started at the timing when the game medium passes through the starting areas provided in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening as the starting winning is generated. After that, in the variable display that is the target variation of the color change effect, the execution of the color change effect is completed at the timing provided after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode. The battle zone effect can be started to be executed at the start timing of the battle zone effect accompanying the start of the variable display based on the winning determination result included in the hold display data. After that, in the variable display that changes the target of the battle zone effect, the execution of the battle zone effect ends at the timing when the final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is derived and displayed by the stop display.

FIG. 10-17 (A) shows a control example 78AKC01 of the timing at which the execution of the color change effect is started and the timing at which the execution of the color change effect is ended. In the control example 78AKC01, at the timing T01 when the start winning is generated, the execution of the color change effect based on the passage of the game ball through the start area is started. After that, after a shift timing accompanying the start of the variable display different from the target variation, the variable display that becomes the target variation is started, and the execution of the color change effect ends at the timing T02 provided after the reach is established. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, if the target change of the color change effect, it is possible to determine to execute the advance notice after the reach is established in step 77AKS37. As a result, if it is decided to execute the notice after the reach is established, the notice after the reach is established can be executed in the period after the timing T02. In this way, by executing the color change effect during the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02, it is possible to change the plurality of effect displays to colors different from the usual ones. It should be noted that, for example, a color change effect is produced at an arbitrary timing included in the period from timing T01 to timing T02, such as a shift timing accompanying the start of variable display different from the target fluctuation and a timing at which the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation is started. The effect control may be performed so that the color change effect is restored after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 5 seconds or the like) has elapsed.

FIG. 10-17 (B) shows a control example 78AKC02 of the timing at which the execution of the battle zone effect is started and the timing at which the execution of the battle zone effect is ended. In the control example 78AKC02, after the start winning is generated, the execution of the battle zone effect based on the winning determination result included in the hold display data is started at the timing T11 which is the shift timing accompanying the start of the new variable display. .. After that, the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation is started, and after the reach is established and the advance notice is executed after the reach is established, the execution of the battle zone effect ends at the timing T12 of the end of the target fluctuation by the derivation display of the final stop symbol. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, it is possible to determine in step 77AKS37 to execute the advance notice after the reach is established, regardless of whether or not the battle zone effect is being executed. In this way, it can be suggested that the big hit game state is controlled at a predetermined ratio by executing the battle zone effect during the period from the timing T11 to the timing T12.

After starting the execution of the color change effect at the timing T01 in the control example 78AKC01 and before ending the execution of the color change effect at the timing T02, the execution of the battle zone effect is started at the timing T11 in the control example 78AKC02. NS. After starting the execution of the battle zone effect at the timing T11 in the control example 78AKC02 and before ending the execution of the battle zone effect at the timing T12, the execution of the color change effect ends at the timing T02 in the control example 78AKC01. .. Therefore, in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed together, and the periods for executing the respective effects overlap. In the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, the battle zone effect is executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. For example, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is executed in the grayscale display color in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, so that the change is made according to the monochrome change. The battle zone effect is executed by the color of the monochrome mode corresponding to the color. Further, when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is executed in the golden display color in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, so that the effect display in the battle zone effect is executed in the golden system display color according to the golden system change. The battle zone effect is executed by the changed color and the corresponding golden color.

In the period from timing T02 to timing T12, the battle zone effect is executed by the normal color in response to the end of the color change effect. For example, after the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the color change is executed by returning the effect display in the battle zone effect from the monochrome mode color to the normal mode color in the period from timing T02 to timing T12. After the production is finished, the battle zone production can be performed with the normal colors. Further, after the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is returned from the color of the golden mode to the color of the normal mode and executed in the period from timing T02 to timing T12. After the color change effect is completed, the battle zone effect can be executed with the normal colors. In this way, the battle zone effect can be completed at a timing later than the color change effect, and the battle zone effect can be executed by the normal color after the color change effect is completed.

FIG. 10-18 shows an effect execution example corresponding to the variable display that is the target variation of the color change effect and the battle zone effect. In the effect execution example 78AK101 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A1), the variable display that becomes the target variation of the battle zone effect is started when there is no color change effect in which the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 78AK102 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A2), when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the variable display that becomes the target variation of the battle zone effect is started. In the effect execution example 78AK103 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A3), when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the variable display that becomes the target variation of the battle zone effect is started.

After that, in the effect execution example 78AK111 shown in FIG. 10-18 (B), the execution of the color change effect is completed at the timing T02 provided after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. .. More specifically, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed as in the effect execution example 78AK102, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10-15 is performed when the timing T02 is obtained thereafter. In step 78AKS02, it is determined that the end timing is reached after the reach is established. By controlling step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect is completed, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is changed to the normal color. Restore. Further, when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed as in the effect execution example 78AK103, when the timing T02 is obtained thereafter, the step 78AKS02 of the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-15 is formed. Therefore, it is determined that the end timing is reached after the reach is established. By controlling step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the golden system change in the color change effect is completed, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is displayed in the normal color. Return to. Further, in the effect execution example 78AK111, the effect image for notifying the message of "reach!" Is displayed to notify the establishment of the reach, and the timing is such that the advance notice after the establishment of the reach can be executed.

In step 78AKS03 of the effect processing during variable display, the effect control associated with the end of the color change effect may be performed so that the effect image notifying the end of the color change effect is displayed. When the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed as in the effect execution example 78AK102, the effect image for notifying the message "Monochrome time ends !!" may be displayed. The effect image that notifies the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. When the golden system change in the color change effect is executed as in the effect execution example 78AK103, an effect image for notifying the message "Gold time is over !!" may be displayed. The effect image that notifies the end of the golden system change in the color change effect may be displayed in a golden display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the golden display color. The effect image notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. With such a display, when the color change effect is completed, it is possible to hide the scene where the display color is changed and suppress a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display color.

In the effect execution example 78AK112 shown in FIG. 10-18 (C), the group display notice is executed among the notices after the reach is established. When the notice after the reach is established, such as the group display notice, the execution of the color change effect is completed, so the effect display is displayed according to the notice after the reach is established regardless of the color changed according to the color change effect. It can be a different color. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, if it is determined by step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being produced and it is determined by step 77AKS36 that the target is not changed, step 77AKS37 is not executed. It is not decided to carry out the notice after the reach is established. Therefore, when the color change effect is being executed, the color of the effect display in the notice after the reach is established is changed by limiting the execution of the advance notice after the reach is established until the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation is executed. Can be prevented.

In the effect execution example 78AK113 shown in FIG. 10-18 (D), the effect display that becomes the reach effect of the super reach after the reach is established is executed. At this time, the battle zone effect is continuously executed, and the background image display and the telop display correspond to the battle zone effect. Further, by executing the reach effect using the effect image showing the character CH1, the effect display related to the battle zone effect may be executed. After that, in the effect execution example 78AK114 shown in FIG. 10-18 (E), the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the execution of the battle zone effect ends at the timing T12 of the end of the target variation. There is. In this way, while the battle zone effect and the color change effect can be executed with the same variable display as the target variation, the battle zone effect can be completed at a later timing than the color change effect, and the color change effect can be performed. After the end, the battle zone effect can be executed in normal colors. When the battle zone effect and the color change effect are executed with the same variable display as the target variation, the effect mode is different from the case where the color change effect is not executed in the variable display which is the target variation. Reach production may be performed. The reach effect of such a super reach may be a dedicated effect display when the execution of the battle zone effect is started while the monochrome change or the golden system change in the color change effect is being executed.

FIG. 10-19 shows a configuration example of an effect display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn by being divided into, for example, a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-19, layers AKL0 to AKL4 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, layer AKL0 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like that is an effect for gold color when a gold color system change in a color change effect is executed so as to be displayable. The layer AKL1 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL0, and is a variable display including a small symbol display area AKA1 serving as a first interface display area and a variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as a second interface display area. Draw related production images so that they can be displayed. The layer AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL1 and draws a production image of the notice effect included in the full-screen notice effect such as a story notice among the notices during all symbol changes so that it can be displayed. .. Layer AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer AKL2, and is an effect image showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and all of them. Among the notices during the pattern change, the effect image of the notice effect, which is a general notice that is not included in the full-screen notice effect, such as the step-up notice, is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer AKL4 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer AKL4 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is specified as the drawing target in the order of layers AKL3, AKL2, AKL1, and AKL0. May be good. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer AKL0 to AKL4, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer AKL0 to AKL4 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is high. You can do it like this.

For example, the effect image that is the effect for gold color drawn on the layer AKL0 is the drawing target when the gold color system change in the color change effect is executed, while the gold color system display in the color change effect is executed. If not, it will not be drawn. Further, for example, the effect image of the advance notice effect drawn on the layer AKL2 becomes a drawing target when the full screen advance notice effect such as the story advance notice is executed among the advance notices during the change of all symbols, while the full screen advance notice effect is performed. Is not executed, it will not be drawn. Depending on whether or not it is a drawing target, a layer on which the effect image is not drawn may be provided. Alternatively, a layer on which the effect image is not drawn may be excluded from the control target depending on whether or not it is a drawing target. For example, the effect image showing the decorative pattern drawn on the layer AKL3 and the effect image of the advance notice effect may actually be the effect images drawn on different layers according to the respective display priorities, and in this embodiment, they may be the effect images. , In order to explain the image processing associated with the execution of the color change effect, it is assumed that the image is drawn on the same layer AKL3.

When the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area are also different from the normal colors. It changes to a different golden display color. Therefore, the layer AKL0 that draws the effect image that is the effect for gold color is set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL1 that draws the effect image related to the variable display. On the other hand, the layer AKL1 that draws the effect image related to the variable display may be set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL0 that draws the effect image that is the effect for gold. The display priority may be different depending on the small symbol display area AKA1 serving as the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area. For example, the layer for drawing the effect image of the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area is set so as to have the highest display priority, and the effect of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area. The layer on which the image is drawn may be set as the layer AKL1 so as to have a lower display priority than the layer AKL0 on which the effect image serving as the golden effect is drawn. In addition, the display priority according to the layer on which various effect images are drawn can be arbitrarily set based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The VDP77AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM77AK145 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high. In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the plurality of display layers is executed, and the display image AKX1 including the effect image corresponding to the plurality of effect displays is generated. The display image AKX1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers AKL0 to AKL5 are superposed and combined as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

When the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect, the effect image drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 is converted into a grayscale display color to change the color to a color different from the normal color. As described above, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are included in the monochrome change target that changes the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target to a color different from the usual one when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. When the golden color change is executed in the color change effect, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are converted into the golden display color to change the color to a color different from the normal color. As described above, the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are included in the golden system change target that changes the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target to a color different from the normal color when the golden system change is executed in the color change effect. Is done.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the color change synthesis process executed by VDP77AK132. The color change synthesis process is executed when, for example, a display list including a drawing command for color blending as a color overlay is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder of VDP77AK132. The color overlay is, for example, an image processing function of the drawing circuit 77AK144 of the VDP77AK132, and by applying a conversion formula prepared in advance to the target image data, an image having a new color can be formed.

When the color change composition process is started, the image data to be converted is read out (step 79AKS01). The image data to be converted is image data to be converted in color by a color blend serving as a color overlay in order to execute a color change effect. For example, in the VDP77AK132, the image data to be converted is read from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM77AK145 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit 77AK141 of the VDP77AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 77AK123, the external RAM 77AK125, the buffer area of the VRAM77AK145, or the like by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and works on the VRAM77AK145. It may be transferred to an area or the like and stored. As the image data to be converted, image data indicating an effect image to be drawn on any of layers AKL1 to AKL4 is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers.

After step 79AKS01, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 79AKS02). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data indicating the effect image drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 is stored in the frame buffer of VRAM77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 first stores in the frame buffer image data indicating an effect image drawn on the layer AKL4 specified by the drawing command by the graphics decoder 77AK143 or the drawing circuit 77AK144. As a result, the effect image on the layer AKL4 is drawn. Next, the VDP77AK132 stores the image data indicating the effect image drawn on the layer AKL3 specified by the drawing command by the graphics decoder 77AK143 and the drawing circuit 77AK144 while synthesizing the image data stored in the frame buffer. .. At this time, the inter-pixel arithmetic processing according to the drawing command may be executed. In this way, the effect image in the layer AKL3 is combined with the effect image in the layer AKL4 so as to be superimposed and drawn. Up to this point, the effect images of the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are drawn in full color, which is the normal color.

Following step 79AKS02, image processing of a color blend to be monochrome conversion is executed (step 79AKS03). In step 79AKS03, the values of the R component, the G component, and the B component are converted into grayscale display colors for each pixel of the effect image in the layers AKL3 and AKL4 drawn by step 79AKS02. Will be done. As a result, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are changed to grayscale colors different from the normal colors.

Next to step 79AKS03, the images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 79AKS04). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data indicating the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 is stored in the frame buffer of VRAM77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data indicating an effect image drawn on the layer AKL2 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. Since the effect image such as the story notice included in the full-screen notice effect is drawn on the layer AKL2, the image showing the effect image drawn on the layer AKL2 during the period when the story notice in the notice during all symbol changes is not executed. There is no need to store the data in the frame buffer. Further, the VDP77AK 132 stores the image data indicating the effect image drawn on the layer AKL1 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing the image data stored in the frame buffer. At this time, the inter-pixel arithmetic processing according to the drawing command may be executed. In this way, the effect images in the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are combined with the effect images in the layers AKL3 and AKL4 so as to be superimposed and drawn. At this time, the effect images of the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are grayscale colors, whereas the effect images of the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are drawn in full color, which is the normal color.

After that, it is determined whether or not a drawing command for gold conversion has been received (step 79AKS05). At this time, if there is no drawing command for gold color conversion (step 79AKS05; No), the color change composition process ends. On the other hand, when the drawing command for gold color conversion is received (step 79AKS05; Yes), the image processing of the color blend that becomes the gold color conversion is executed (step 79AKS06). In step 79AKS06, the values of the R component, the G component, and the B component are converted for each pixel of the effect image drawn in the frame buffer by using a conversion formula for changing the display color of the gold system. At this time, each pixel of the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be changed to a grayscale color in the same manner as in step 79AKS03, and then changed to a golden color. When the production image that changes to a golden color is directly changed from the normal color to the golden color, for example, when there is a color bias in the normal color, the golden color becomes unnatural. There is a risk of giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the effect image to be changed to the golden color is once changed from the normal color to the grayscale color, and then changed to the golden color. As a result, for example, even if there is a color bias in the normal color, the golden color becomes natural and the discomfort given to the player can be suppressed.

When such image processing in step 79AKS06 is executed, for example, by the image processing in step 79AKS03, the image data to be displayed is changed from the normal color to the display color using grayscale color. To reduce the number of colors in the image data. The effect image of the display color using the grayscale color is a multi-gradation single-color image expressed in a single color having different brightness depending on the pixel position. After that, in the image processing according to step 79AKS06, the image processing corresponding to the display color using the golden color is applied by executing the image processing of the color blend using the conversion formula corresponding to the color overlay. As a result, the effect images corresponding to the plurality of effect displays drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are changed to a common color such as a display color using a golden color.

When the image processing according to step 79AKS06 is executed, the gold color effect is applied (step 79AKS07), and then the color change composition processing is terminated. In step 79AKS07, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data indicating the effect image drawn on the layer AKL0 is stored in the frame buffer of VRAM77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data indicating an effect image drawn on the layer AKL0 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. An effect image serving as a golden effect is drawn on the layer AKL0, and the effect image may have a color corresponding to a gold-based display color in a normal state. By executing the image processing to apply the golden effect in step 79AKS07, the player can easily recognize the display color using the golden color, and the player's impression of the golden change in the color change effect is enhanced. be able to.

In this way, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the process of changing the normal color to the grayscale color for the effect image drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 by the color overlay is performed. Will be done. When the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 is changed from the normal color to the grayscale color by the color overlay, and then the grayscale. The process of changing the color of is changed to a golden color is performed. In the color change composition process, the color change process according to the common steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 can be executed depending on whether the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed or the golden system change in the color change effect is executed. By being able to execute the common color change processing in this way, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while reducing the processing load of changing the color of the effect display.

In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-19, an effect image serving as a golden effect is drawn on the layer AKL0. In step 79AKS07 of the color change composition processing, the effect image is drawn on the layer AKL0, which has a higher display priority than the layers AKL1 to AKL4 to which the image processing corresponding to the display color using the golden color is applied. It is possible to display the effect by the effect for gold with priority over the effect display changed to the golden color. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the change in the golden system in the color change effect and improve the interest of the color change effect.

As described above, in the feature units 77AK to 79AK, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning prize are shown, such as the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. 10-17 (A). The period from the timing when the game ball passes through the starting area provided in the mouth to the timing provided after the establishment of the reach in which the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode after the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation is started. In, it is possible to execute a color change effect that changes the color of a plurality of effect displays displayed during that period.

The battle zone effect suggesting that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state included in the advantageous state is a color change such as the period from the timing T11 to the timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17 (B). It can be executed at least in a period different from the period in which the production is executed. When both the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period from timing T11 to timing T02 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02 shown in FIGS. 10-17 (A) and 10-17 (B), etc. In addition, the period in which the color change effect is executed and the period in which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap. In the period from the timing T02 to the timing T12 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, in the period in which the battle zone effect is executed without overlapping with the period in which the color change effect is executed, FIGS. 10-16 (B1) and FIGS. As in the production execution examples 77AK202 and 77AK203 shown in 10-16 (C1) and the production execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113 shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) to (D), the battle zone production is performed by normal colors. Run. In the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, which overlaps with the period in which the color change effect is executed and the battle zone effect is executed, FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 are shown. As shown in the production execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in (C2) and the production execution examples 77AK222 and 77AK223 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3), the color of the battle zone production is changed. It is executed by the color that changed according to the production and the corresponding special color.

When such a color change effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is a normal color corresponding to no color change effect or a special color corresponding to a monochrome change or a gold color change in the color change effect. For example, a part of the battle zone production, such as a voice production corresponding to the battle zone, can be executed in a common production mode. Production execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 (C2), and production execution examples 77AK222 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3). , 77AK223 is a special color corresponding to a monochrome change or a golden system change in the color change effect. In this case, as in the production execution examples 77AK202 and 77AK203 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B1) and 10-16 (C1), the normal colors are obtained without the color change effect. By reproducing and outputting the music phrases PHA1 and PHA2, it is possible to execute the audio production corresponding to the battle zone in a common production mode. In this way, it is possible to execute a part of the battle zone effect in a common effect mode regardless of whether it is a normal color or a special color. Therefore, when the color of the effect display differs depending on the presence or absence of the color change effect. Even if there is, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed, and the player can pay attention to both the color change effect and the battle zone effect, and the game interest can be improved.

When the color change effect and the battle zone effect can be executed, the color change effect reaches in a variable display in which the target fluctuates, as in the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. 10-17 (A). It can be completed at the timing provided after the establishment. On the other hand, in the battle zone effect, the target variation ends when the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display that becomes the target variation, as in the timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17 (B). It can be finished at the timing of. In this way, the battle zone effect can be completed at a later timing than the color change effect. In the period during which the battle zone effect is executed after the end of the color change effect, such as the period from the timing T02 to the timing T12 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, the effects shown in FIGS. As in the execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113, the battle zone effect can be executed by the normal color. In this way, after the color change effect is completed, the battle zone effect can be executed by the normal color, so that the player can easily recognize that the battle zone effect is continuously executed while the color change effect is completed. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color change production and the battle zone production, and improve the game interest.

As the color change effect, a monochrome change for changing to a display color using grayscale colors as in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (C) and 10-9 (D), and FIG. 10 One of a plurality of effects including, as in the effect execution examples 77AKH22 and 77AKH23 shown in -10 (C) and FIG. 10-10 (D), a golden system change that changes the display color using a golden color system. Is feasible. In the color change composition process shown in FIG. 10-20, steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 are used depending on whether the display color is changed to a grayscale display color corresponding to a monochrome change or a golden display color corresponding to a golden system change. It is possible to carry out the common color change processing in. In this way, since the common color change processing can be executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while reducing the processing load of changing the color of the effect display.

(Modification example of characteristic parts 77AK to 79AK)
In the color change effect, one of the color attributes such as hue, saturation, and lightness is reduced to a narrower range than the normal color, so that various colors of multiple effect displays are common. Any production that changes to color is sufficient. Instead of a display color using gray scale colors or a display color using golden colors, or in addition to a display color using gray scale colors or a display color using golden colors, for example, By displaying a multi-gradation single-color image using blue-based colors, green-based colors, red-based colors, or any other color, the colors change from the normal colors of multiple production displays. I just need to be able to do it. Instead of the color change effect, or in addition to the color change effect, for example, a pattern change effect that changes various patterns of a plurality of effect displays into a common pattern may be feasible. In addition, it is sufficient that a visibility change effect that changes a plurality of effect displays into arbitrary display modes having common visibility can be executed as a special effect by the effect control that is at least partially common to the color change effect.

The specific effect that suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state is not limited to the battle zone effect, but by displaying an effect image different from the normal time prepared in advance based on the winning judgment result corresponding to the hold display. Any effect that can be suggested to be controlled in an advantageous state may be used. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, and may be any gaming state or production state in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal state. For example, a special gaming state such as a time saving state or a probability change state may be set as an advantageous state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). The advantageous state may be a case where the gaming situation becomes more advantageous for the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive chans (for example, "10").

In the above embodiment, under the control of step 77AKS07 shown in FIG. 10-7, the sound effect is executed in the same effect mode as the period in which the color change effect is not executed during the period when the color change effect is executed. Explained as possible. On the other hand, instead of or in addition to the sound effect, for example, a light emitting effect by lighting a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, a movable body operation effect by the operation of the movable body 32, and others. Of the effects produced by the arbitrary effect device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, at least a part of the effects may be performed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

In the period in which the color change effect is executed, the sound effect may be executed in an effect mode different from the period in which the color change effect is not executed. However, when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the color change effect, the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone may be preferentially executed over the sound effect corresponding to the color change. As a result, a part of the battle zone effect, such as the sound effect included in the battle zone effect, may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed. In place of or in addition to the voice production, at least a part of the light emission production, the movable body movement production, and other productions by any production device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included in the battle zone production. If so, some of the effects included in this battle zone effect may be able to be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

When the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the color change effect, the sound effect corresponding to the color change may be executed with priority over the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. For example, when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect, the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone is preferentially executed over the sound effect corresponding to the monochrome change. On the other hand, when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the golden color change in the color change effect, the sound effect corresponding to the golden color change is prioritized over the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. Run. Here, the battle zone effect may be executed at a rate according to the variable display result so that the jackpot expectation is higher than the monochrome change and the golden change is higher than the big hit expectation than the battle zone effect. As a result, a part of the battle zone effect, such as the sound effect included in the battle zone effect, is the same as the case where the color change effect is not executed when the color change effect is executed in the first mode. While it is feasible in the aspect, when the color change effect is executed in the second aspect, it may be feasible in an effect mode different from the case where the color change effect is not executed. When the battle zone effect is executed during the execution of the golden system change in the color change effect, the sound effect can be executed in a special effect mode different from the case where the battle zone effect is not executed during the execution of the golden system change. There may be.

Even when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 have different colors of the effect image specified as the drawing target, as in the case where the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. While changing to different colors, the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be controlled so as not to change the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target to a color different from the usual one. As described above, the monochrome change target and the golden system change target are both layers AKL3 and AKL4, and layers AKL1 and AKL2 may not be included. In this case, the small symbol display area AKA1 serving as the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area are maintained without changing their normal colors. The effect display in the story preview effect is the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed, regardless of the monochrome change and the golden system change in the color change effect, regardless of the period in which the color change effect is executed. May be feasible by

When the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are not included in the gold color system change target, in the color change synthesis process shown in FIG. 10-20, after performing the color blend by step 79AKS03, and before step 79AKS04, the determination by step 79AKS05. Just do. In this case, after performing the image processing corresponding to the change in the golden system according to steps 79AKS06 and 79AKS07, the process may proceed to step 79AKS05. Even in such a case, the color change processing according to steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 in the color change synthesis process is a common process depending on whether the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed or the golden system change in the color change effect is executed. It can be executed as.

The timing to end the color change effect is, for example, the timing when one or more pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed, the timing when a specific advance notice effect is executed, and the decorative pattern which is a specific chance eye, before the reach is established. The timing when the stop display is displayed, or the timing when the development effect that develops from the reach effect of the normal reach to the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the reach is established, and the timing when the specific cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect. , Timing when a specific movable body motion effect is executed, and other arbitrary timings after the execution of the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation is started and before the final stop symbol is derived and displayed and the execution of the variable display is finished. It may be. When the color change effect can be ended at any of the plurality of timings, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the timing at which the color change effect is finished. For example, by ending the color change effect at a later timing among a plurality of timings, the timing for ending the color change effect becomes higher as the execution period of the color change effect becomes longer. It may be decided. The timing of ending the color change effect may be set differently depending on whether or not the advance notice is executed after the reach is established during the execution of the variable display that is the target variation. The timing to end the battle zone effect may be a timing that ends later than the color change effect, and before the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display that becomes the target fluctuation and the execution of the variable display ends. It may be the timing of.

The rate at which the battle zone effect is executed may be different depending on whether or not the color change effect is being executed. For example, when the color change effect is being executed, the battle zone effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the color change effect is not executed. When the display result of the variable display that is the target fluctuation is "big hit", the battle zone effect can be executed at a high rate while the color change effect is being executed, and the display result of the variable display that is the target fluctuation is "missing". , The battle zone effect may be able to be executed at a low rate while the color change effect is being executed.

The story notice is included in the full-screen notice effect, and by displaying the effect image for the notice on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, it is limited to those executed using a larger image than the step-up notice. However, even when the effect image for advance notice is displayed on a part of the display screen, it may be feasible to use an image larger than the step-up advance notice. Not limited to the story notice and the step-up notice, when the second notice effect is executed using an image larger than the first notice effect, the color change effect is also executed during the period when the color change effect is executed. It may be feasible with no period and common colors.

The display that does not change the color even if the color change effect is executed is replaced with the small symbol display area AKA1 or the second interface display area AKA2 that is the first interface display area, or the small symbol display that is the first interface display area. In addition to the area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2, the notification display related to the variable display, the notification display related to the game, the notification display related to the effect setting, the notification display related to the occurrence of an abnormality, or a part or all of these are included. You may.

The notification display related to the variable display may include a display of the fourth symbol, a display of the remaining number of times of the variable display, a display of the remaining time of the variable display, or a part or a combination of all of them. The fourth symbol may be variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in synchronization with the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is the display area of either the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area or the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area, or the small symbol display. Display control that repeats display and non-display with a specific display color at regular time intervals in the 4th symbol display area, which is the 3rd interface display area provided separately from the area AKA1 and the variable display compatible display area AKA3. It is realized by continuing. The display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to see than the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol. The remaining number of times of the variable display can be displayed up to the remaining number of times of the variable display in which the time reduction control and the probability change control are performed, or the variable display which is the target fluctuation of the color change effect, the battle zone effect, and other advance notice effects. The remaining number of times may be displayed so as to be identifiable. The remaining time of the variable display can specify the remaining time until the end of the variable display or the remaining time until a specific effect is executed during the variable display in the last variable display in which the time reduction control or the probability variation control is performed. Anything that is displayed in. Alternatively, the remaining time of the variable display is the remaining time until the end of the variable display for the variable display that is the target fluctuation of the color change effect, the battle zone effect, and other notice effects, or a specific effect is executed during the variable display. It suffices if the remaining time until it is done is displayed in a identifiable manner.

The notification display related to the game may include a launch promotion display, an electric chew open display, a payout number display, an area passage display, or a part or a combination of all of them. The launch promotion display may be a display that prompts the launch of a game ball in a specific direction by, for example, a right-handed notification or a left-handed display. The electric chew open display may be any identifiable indication that the variable winning ball device 6B changes to an open state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning opening. The payout number display may be any one that displays the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in a identifiable manner. The area passage display may be any display that can identify that the game ball has passed through a specific passage area provided in the game area.

The display related to the effect setting may include a volume setting display, a light amount setting display, a mode selection display, or a part or a combination of all of them. The volume setting display may be such that the volume setting that can be changed by the operation of the player on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identifiable. The light amount setting display may be any display that can specify the setting of the light amount that can be changed by the operation of the player in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The mode selection display may be such that the setting of the effect mode that can be selected by the operation of the player in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in a identifiable manner.

The notification display regarding the occurrence of an abnormality is a display for notifying an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and is a door opening error, an illegal winning error, a switch detection error, a prize ball payout error, a magnet error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, and a full. A tan error, a ball out error, a ball jam error, a processor error, a memory error, an effect device error, or a part or a combination of all of these may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

In the above embodiment, in the variable display in which the winning determination result is "general at the time of loss", the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the reach mode, and the reach effect of the normal reach may be executed. Then, in the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, if the reach mode is reached before the target changes during the execution of the color change effect, it is determined in step 77AKS36 that the target changes. By doing so, it is restricted so that the notice will not be executed after the reach is established. On the other hand, during the execution of the color change effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is prevented from being in the reach mode, so that the advance notice after the reach is established is restricted before the target changes. You may. For example, the winning judgment result that can be notified by the winning judgment result command includes "non-reach confirmation at the time of loss" indicating that the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the non-reach confirmation range at the time of loss. May be good. The non-reach determination range may be preset as a range of random values determined in the non-reach fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved storages. In this case, in step 77AKS01 of the pre-reading notice setting process, if a winning judgment result different from the “non-reach confirmed at the time of loss” is included before the winning judgment result this time, the color change is restricted. It may be determined that there is. Further, in step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is "non-reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if it is "non-reach confirmed at the time of loss", the process proceeds to step 77AKS15. If it is not "non-reach confirmed at the time of loss", the process may proceed to step 77AKS16. As a result, during the execution of the color change effect or the battle zone effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and it is possible to limit the execution of the notice after the reach is established, which is a special effect.

The timing to start the color change effect is the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the timing when the game ball passes through the start area, the timing when a specific variable display effect is executed, and the timing when the game ball passes through the start area. Then, it may be an arbitrary timing before the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation is started. The timing to start the battle zone effect may be any time as long as it starts later than the color change effect when the color change effect is executed, and before the reach is established, for example, one or more pseudo-reams. The timing when the fluctuation is executed, the timing when a specific notice effect is executed, the timing when the decorative symbol that is a specific chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, or after the reach is established, the reach effect of the normal reach is changed to the reach effect of the super reach. The game ball has passed through the starting area, such as the timing when the development effect that develops into is executed, the timing when a specific cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect, the timing when the specific movable body motion effect is executed, and so on. It may be any timing after the timing and before the start of the execution of the variable display that is the target variation.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 77AK)
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the start area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is the first from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the start area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect suggesting that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state are provided. A specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods is provided, and when the special effect and the specific effect are executed together, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means is the first. In the second period, which does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is executed by the normal color, and in the second period, which overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is executed by the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color. It is possible to execute a part of a specific effect in a common effect mode depending on whether it is a color or a special color. Here, the starting region may be, for example, a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Executing the specific effect with normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Executing the specific effect with a special color may be performed, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden system change due to the color change effect. A part of the specific effect that can be executed in the common effect mode may be, for example, a sound effect that outputs the music phrases PHA1 and PHA2.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on the special effect and the specific effect and improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to execute the specific effect after the execution of the special effect is started, and the execution of the special effect may be restricted after the execution of the specific effect is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed in step 77AKS01.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the specific production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute a start notification effect that notifies that the execution of the special effect is started, and when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the first period starts, priority is given to the predetermined advance notice effect. The start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
In such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is started, and to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to execute the special information display regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, the special information display may be executed in the same color as the period other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. For example, in the case of the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13, the common color can be executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately displaying the special information.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, when the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the start area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. It may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the stop display period ends, for example, when the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the start setting of the color change effect is set in step 77AKS42. And so on.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The special effect includes a first special effect that changes to the first color and a second special effect that changes to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the situation, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be different. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, a monochrome change due to a color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, a case of a golden system change due to a color change effect.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the special production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute the first notice effect and the second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is the color corresponding to the color changed according to the special effect. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as the period other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice production may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during the change of all symbols. What can be executed by the changed color and the corresponding color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK214. What can be executed by the common color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK215.
In such a configuration, the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to continuously execute the special effect until a specific timing during the execution of the variable display that targets the special effect, the special effect can be executed in response to the specific timing, and the execution of the special effect is restricted in the first period. You may. Here, the specific timing may be, for example, the timing T02 corresponding to the establishment of reach. The special effect may be, for example, a notice after the reach is established. The execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When executing the special effect, the color of the screen display may be changed by applying the image processing corresponding to the special color after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced, for example, when monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when the gold color conversion color blend is executed in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The effect display may be prioritized over the display using the image data to which the image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display that is an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When the specific effect is executed in the second period that overlaps with the first period, it may be possible to execute the parallel notification effect that notifies that the special effect is being executed in parallel with the specific effect. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect to improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 78AK)
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the start area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is the first from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the start area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect suggesting that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state are provided. A specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods is provided, and when the special effect and the specific effect are executed together, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means is the first. In the second period, which does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is executed with normal colors, and in the second period, which overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is executed with the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color, and specified. The effect can be completed at a timing later than that of the special effect, and after the end of the special effect, the specific effect can be executed in normal colors. Here, the starting region may be, for example, a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Executing the specific effect with normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Executing the specific effect with a special color may be performed, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden system change due to the color change effect. The timing later than the special effect may be, for example, timing T12. The fact that the specific effect can be executed by the normal color may be, for example, the effect execution example 78AK111 to 78AK113.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on the special effect and the specific effect and improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to execute the specific effect after the execution of the special effect is started, and the execution of the special effect may be restricted after the execution of the specific effect is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed in step 77AKS01.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the specific production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute a start notification effect that notifies that the execution of the special effect is started, and when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the first period starts, priority is given to the predetermined advance notice effect. The start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
In such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is started, and to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to execute the special information display regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, the special information display may be executed in the same color as the period other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. For example, in the case of the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13, the common color can be executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately displaying the special information.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, when the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the start area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. It may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the stop display period ends, for example, when the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the start setting of the color change effect is set in step 77AKS42. And so on.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The special effect includes a first special effect that changes to the first color and a second special effect that changes to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the situation, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be different. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, a monochrome change due to a color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, a case of a golden system change due to a color change effect.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the special production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute the first notice effect and the second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is the color corresponding to the color changed according to the special effect. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as the period other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice production may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during the change of all symbols. What can be executed by the changed color and the corresponding color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK214. What can be executed by the common color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK215.
In such a configuration, the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to continuously execute the special effect until a specific timing during the execution of the variable display that targets the special effect, the special effect can be executed in response to the specific timing, and the execution of the special effect is restricted in the first period. You may. Here, the specific timing may be, for example, the timing T02 corresponding to the establishment of reach. The special effect may be, for example, a notice after the reach is established. The execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When executing the special effect, the color of the screen display may be changed by applying the image processing corresponding to the special color after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced, for example, when monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when the gold color conversion color blend is executed in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The effect display may be prioritized over the display using the image data to which the image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display that is an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When the specific effect is executed in the second period that overlaps with the first period, it may be possible to execute the parallel notification effect that notifies that the special effect is being executed in parallel with the specific effect. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect to improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 79AK)
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the start area and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and for a predetermined period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the start area. In the above, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect for changing a plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period to a common color is provided, and the special effect executing means changes to the first color as a special effect. It is possible to execute any of a plurality of special effects including a first special effect to be caused and a second special effect to be changed to a second color different from the first color, and a case of changing to the first color and a first Further, a change processing means capable of executing a common color change process in the case of changing to two colors is further provided. Here, the starting region may be, for example, a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The predetermined period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The first special effect may be, for example, a monochrome change due to a color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, a case of a golden system change due to a color change effect. The change processing means may be, for example, VDP77AK132 that executes steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while reducing the processing load of the effect of changing the color.

When a predetermined period and a specific period overlap in a state in which a specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state is provided with a specific effect execution means that can be executed in a specific period and both the special effect and the specific effect are executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the specific effect after the execution of the special effect is started, and the execution of the special effect may be restricted after the execution of the specific effect is started. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The specific period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed in step 77AKS01.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the specific production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute a start notification effect that notifies that the execution of the special effect is started, and when the predetermined advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined period starts, priority is given to the predetermined advance notice effect. The start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
In such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is started, and to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to execute the special information display regarding the progress of the game, and the special information display may be executed in a predetermined period with the same color as the period other than the predetermined period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. For example, in the case of the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13, the common color can be executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately displaying the special information.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, when the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the start area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. It may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the stop display period ends, for example, when the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the start setting of the color change effect is set in step 77AKS42. And so on.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

Depending on whether the first special effect or the second special effect is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be different.
In such a configuration, the expectation can be appropriately raised by the special production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It is possible to execute the first notice effect and the second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in a predetermined period, the first notice effect is changed according to the special effect and the corresponding color is used. It may be feasible, and the second notice effect may be feasible in a predetermined period with the same color as the period other than the predetermined period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice production may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during the change of all symbols. What can be executed by the changed color and the corresponding color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK214. What can be executed by the common color may be, for example, the case of the effect execution example 77AK215.
In such a configuration, the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

It is possible to continuously execute the special effect until a specific timing during the execution of the variable display that targets the special effect, the special effect can be executed in response to the specific timing, and the execution of the special effect is restricted during a predetermined period. You may. Here, the specific timing may be, for example, the timing T02 corresponding to the establishment of reach. The special effect may be, for example, a notice after the reach is established. The execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When executing a special effect, after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed, a plurality of effect displays may be changed to a common color by applying image processing corresponding to the special color. .. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced, for example, when monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when the gold color conversion color blend is executed in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The effect display may be prioritized over the display using the image data to which the image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display that is an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, the special effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When a predetermined period and a specific period overlap in a state in which a specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state is provided with a specific effect executing means that can be executed in a specific period and both the special effect and the specific effect are executed. When a specific effect is executed in a specific period that overlaps with a predetermined period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification effect that notifies that the special effect is being executed in parallel with the specific effect. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature part 05AK)
Regarding the feature unit 05AK, at least during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the screen display related to the variable display is oscillated as a specific area in which a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed. The production can be performed. The rocking effect is included in the advance notice effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the variable display result may be "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on whether the swing effect is executed or not. For example, when the swing effect is executed, the variable display result may be "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state may be higher than when the swing effect is not executed. The rocking effect is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and may be continuously executed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The swing effect may be continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays.

FIG. 11-1 shows a case where the swing effect is executed when the color change effect is not executed as the first execution example of the swing effect regarding the feature unit 05AK. When the color change effect is not executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal display color, which is the normal color, depending on whether the swing effect is executed or not. .. The display color at the normal time may be specified by a pixel value such as an RGB value which is a pixel value of each pixel in the image data indicating the effect image.

FIG. 11-1 (A) shows a screen in which a plurality of effect images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at the same time before the swing effect is executed during the period when the color change effect is not executed. An effect execution example 05AK01 by display is shown. In the effect execution example 05AK01, a plurality of effect displays in the screen display displayed at the same time are displayed in normal colors corresponding to the normal time when the color change effect is not executed. In the active display unit AKB0, a display image AKE0 that displays white is displayed. In the first hold display unit AKB1, the hold display associated with the hold numbers "1" and "2" is performed corresponding to the first hold storage number "2". The display image AKE1 that displays blue is displayed as the hold display associated with the hold number "1", and the display image AKE0 that displays white is displayed as the hold display associated with the hold number "2". There is.

FIG. 11-1 (B) shows the effect execution example 05AK02 by the screen display in which the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK01. There is. When the rocking effect is executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 is, in addition to the display of the effect image in the specific area displayed before the execution of the rocking effect, the rocking background display 05AKG1 and the rocking. The moving outer frame display 05AKG2 and the effect display 05AKG3 are included.

The rocking background display 05AKG1 is a display in a special area outside the screen display, which is a display displayed in the rocking specific area, and is a background image using a base color for the rocking background, such as blue. Any display may be used as long as the effect image is displayed. The rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 is a display in the peripheral region of the edge portion in the screen display, which is a display displayed in the swinging specific area, and uses a basic color for the rocking outer frame such as silver. Any display may be used as long as the effect image is displayed as the outer frame image. The effect display 05AKG03 is a screen display which is a display displayed in a specific area to be shaken by a swing effect at a specific position included in the screen display, such as the upper part of the screen display in the image display device 5, and a background when swinging. It is possible to display at least one of the display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 in a straddling display mode, and the effect image using the basic color for the rocking effect, for example, the normal color is rainbow. It suffices if the effect image is displayed.

The screen display, which is a display displayed in a specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, includes a background display during normal operation, a display of a decorative pattern during variable display, a display in a notice effect, and a second interface display area. Of the variable display compatible display area AKA2, the hold display in the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2 is included. The screen display that is shaken by the swing effect may be reduced by a predetermined magnification as compared with the screen display that was displayed before the execution of the swing effect. By reducing the screen display and executing the swing effect, it is sufficient that the player can easily see the swing background display 05AKG1 and the swing outer frame display 05AKG2.

The screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, supports the display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display which is the second interface display area. Of the display area AKA2, the active display in the active display unit AKB0 and the active display are not included. For example, when the display of the small symbol is swung, it becomes difficult for the player to visually confirm whether or not the variable display is executed, and there is a possibility that the distrust of the game increases. When the active display is swung, it may be difficult for the player to visually confirm the warning effect that the display mode of the active display changes, and it may be difficult to appropriately raise the expectation for the game. .. Therefore, by not swinging the small symbol display or the active display, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the display containing important information about the variable display, and the player's distrust of the game can be suppressed or the game can be played. It is possible to appropriately raise the expectations of the player.

FIG. 11-2 shows a case where the swing effect is executed when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed as the second execution example of the swing effect regarding the feature portion 05AK. If the oscillating effect is executed while the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 displays an area displayed in a grayscale display color, which is a special color, and a normal color. The area displayed in the normal display color is included.

In FIG. 11-2 (A), a plurality of effect images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at the same time before the execution of the swing effect during the period during which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. The effect execution example 05AK11 by the screen display is shown. In the effect execution example 05AK11, in response to the monochrome change in the color change effect, a plurality of effect displays in the screen display displayed at the same time are displayed in a grayscale display color which is a common special color. In the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of monochrome change, the display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area is maintained without changing the color at the normal time. Further, in the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of monochrome change, the color of the active display in the active display unit AKB0 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area is maintained without changing. There is. On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of monochrome change, the hold display in the first hold display section AKB1 and the second hold display section AKB2 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area is special. It is changed to the grayscale display color that becomes the color.

FIG. 11-2 (B) shows an effect execution example 05AK12 by a screen display in which the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK11. There is. In the effect execution example 05AK12, similarly to the effect execution example 05AK02, the screen display of the image display device 5 includes the rocking background display 05AKG1, the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, and the effect display 05AKG3.

In the case of the effect execution example 05AK12, the screen display which is the display displayed in the specific area to be rocked by the rocking effect is displayed in a gray scale display color which is a special color in the color change effect. On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK12, the background display 05AKG1 at the time of shaking, the outer frame display 05AKG2 at the time of shaking, and the effect display 05AKG3 are all maintained without changing the colors at the normal time. For example, the rocking background display 05AKG1 maintains the basic color for the rocking background such as blue, the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 maintains the basic color for the rocking outer frame such as silver, and the effect display 05AKG3 The basic color for rocking effects such as rainbow colors is maintained.

In this way, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color, and the special area is displayed. The rocking background display 05AKG1, which is the display displayed in, is displayed in normal colors. In addition, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color and displayed in the peripheral area. The rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, which is the displayed display, is displayed in normal colors. When both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in normal colors.

When both the color change effect such as monochrome change and the swing effect are executed, the background display 05AKG1 at the time of rocking and the outer frame display 05AKG2 at the time of rocking are displayed in grayscale display colors that are special colors. In addition, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the swinging effect that causes the screen display to swing, and the impression of the swinging effect may decrease. On the other hand, when the color change effect such as monochrome change and the swing effect are both executed, if the screen display that is shaken by the swing effect is returned to the normal color, the color change effect is produced. The player may be given the impression that the color change effect has been completed before the end of the process, and the content of the effect may be misunderstood.

Therefore, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the rocking effect is produced by displaying the rocking background display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 in normal colors. Is easy to see, and it is possible to appropriately perform a swing effect that prevents a decrease in impression. In addition, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the color change is performed by displaying the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, in a special color. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has not been completed, and the color change effect that prevents the player from misidentifying can be appropriately executed. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the color change effect and the swing effect to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 11-3 shows a case where the rocking effect is executed when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed as a third execution example of the rocking effect regarding the feature portion 05AK. If the rocking effect is executed while the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 includes an area displayed in a special golden color display color and a normal area. The area displayed in the normal display color, which is the color, is included.

FIG. 11-3 (A) shows a plurality of effect images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at the same time before the execution of the swing effect during the period during which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed. The effect execution example 05AK21 by the screen display is shown. In the effect execution example 05AK21, in response to the change in the golden system in the color change effect, a plurality of effect displays in the screen display displayed at the same time are displayed in a golden display color which is a common special color. In the effect execution example 05AK21, in the case of a golden color change, not only the hold display in the first hold display section AKB1 and the second hold display section AKB2 but also the first hold display in the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area. The display of small symbols in the small symbol display area AKA1 that serves as the interface display area and the active display in the active display section AKB0 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 that serves as the second interface display area are also displayed in gold, which is a special color. It is changing to a color.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows the effect execution example 05AK22 by the screen display in which the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK21. There is. Even in the effect execution example 05AK22, the screen display of the image display device 5 includes the rocking background display 05AKG1, the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, and the effect display 05AKG3.

In the case of the effect execution example 05AK22, the screen display which is a specific area to be swung by the swing effect is displayed in a golden display color which is a special color in the color change effect. On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK22, both the rocking background display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 are maintained without changing the colors in the normal state. For example, the rocking background display 05AKG1 maintains the basic color for the rocking background such as blue, and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 maintains the basic color for the rocking outer frame such as silver.

In this way, when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color. The rocking background display 05AKG1, which is the display displayed in the area, is displayed in normal colors. In addition, when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color and is displayed in the peripheral area. The rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, which is the displayed display, is displayed in normal colors.

When both the color change effect such as the golden change and the rocking effect are being executed, the background display 05AKG1 at the time of rocking and the outer frame display 05AKG2 at the time of rocking are displayed in the golden display color which is a special color. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the rocking effect that causes the screen display to swing, and the impression of the rocking effect may decrease. On the other hand, when a color change effect such as a golden color change and a swing effect are both executed, if the screen display that is rocked by the rocking effect is returned to the normal color, the color changes. Before the end of the effect, the player may be given the impression that the color change effect has been completed, which may lead to misunderstanding of the content of the effect.

Therefore, when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the rocking effect is played by displaying the rocking background display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 in normal colors. It becomes easier for a person to see, and it is possible to appropriately perform a swing effect that prevents a decrease in impression. In addition, when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be rocked by the rocking effect, is displayed in a special color. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the change effect has not been completed, and the color change effect that prevents the player from misidentifying can be appropriately executed. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the color change effect and the swing effect to improve the game entertainment.

In the effect execution example 05AK22, the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a golden display color which is a special color in the color change effect. In this way, the effect display 05AKG3 may be displayed in a special color when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed. When the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, it is determined that the control is controlled to the jackpot game state, which is a highly expected effect mode in which the player is controlled to an advantageous state. In line with this, by displaying the effect display 05AKG3 in a special color, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player and improve the game entertainment. The effect display 05AKG3 may be displayed in normal colors when both the golden system change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed. Whether to display the effect display 05AKG3 in normal colors or in special colors may be determined at a predetermined ratio. The variable display result may be "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on whether the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a special color or a normal color. For example, when the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a special color, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a normal color. good.

FIG. 11-4 shows an execution example in which the hold display and the active display are performed during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed with respect to the feature unit 05AK. In the feature unit 05AK, in the case of monochrome change, the hold display in the first hold display part AKB1 and the second hold display part AKB2 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area is a gray scale which becomes a special color. It is displayed in the display color of. On the other hand, in the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area, the active display in the active display unit AKB0 is displayed in the normal display color which is the normal color. Here, the display colors in the normal state correspond to the display images AKE0 to AKE4 shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B1) to (B5), and a plurality of types of displays such as white, blue, green, red, and gold are displayed. Any display color that includes colors and is different from the grayscale display color that corresponds to the monochrome change in the color change effect may be used.

In the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2, hold display such as first hold display and second hold display according to the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit AKM1 is performed corresponding to the hold storage. .. The hold storage may include storage of hold information indicating a random number value extracted when a start winning prize occurs. In the active display unit AKB0, active display as a specific display corresponding to the variable display during execution is performed. When the variable display is started, the active display can be executed in a manner related to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. For example, when the first special figure game is started, the hold display associated with the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the first hold display unit AKB1 and the erased hold display is enlarged. The active display is started on the active display unit AKB0. In addition, when the second special figure game is started, the second hold display unit AKB2 erases (digests) the hold display associated with the hold number "1" and displays the erased hold display. The enlarged active display is started in the active display unit AKB0. In this way, in the active display unit AKB0, active display having a larger display size than the hold display, such as the first hold display of the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display of the second hold display unit AKB2, is performed. You may. With the start of the active display, an animation display related to the hold display may be performed. In addition, the active display may be displayed in any display mode related to the hold display.

In the feature unit 05AK, the hold display is displayed in a grayscale display color which is a special color during the period when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, so that the player cannot recognize the normal display color. It will be difficult. On the other hand, in the feature unit 05AK, since the active display is displayed in the normal display color which is the normal color during the period when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the display corresponding to the display images AKE0 to AKE4 is displayed. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the color.

In the effect execution example 05AK31 shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the active display and the two first hold displays are performed. At this time, the first hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is special because the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed even if the normal display color is gold corresponding to the display image AKE4. It is displayed in a gray scale display color, which is a color, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the golden display color. After that, in the effect execution example 05AK32 shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when a new variable display is started, the first hold display of the hold number “1” is deleted, and the display image AKE4 corresponding to this is deleted. The used active display is started. At this time, the active display is displayed in the normal display color which is the normal color even when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, and the player recognizes the gold display color corresponding to the display image AKE4. Will be easy.

When a color change effect such as monochrome change is being executed, the hold display on the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2 is displayed in the same normal color as when the color change effect is not executed. In this case, the number of effect displays for changing the color due to the color change effect is reduced, and the impression of the color change effect may be lowered. On the other hand, when a color change effect such as monochrome change is being executed and the active display on the active display unit AKB0 is displayed in a special color different from the normal color, the display mode of the active display changes. It may be difficult for the player to visually confirm the advance notice effect, etc., and it may be difficult to appropriately raise the expectation for the game. Therefore, when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is executed, the hold display on the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2 is displayed in a special color, and the active display on the active display unit AKB0 is displayed in normal color. Display by. This enhances the sense of unity of the color change effect and prevents the impression from being lowered, and also makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the display containing important information about the variable display, thereby raising the player's expectation. In addition, the hold display and the active display can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When a color change effect such as monochrome change is being executed, the active display differs depending on whether the jackpot expectation is low or high, depending on whether it is displayed in a special color or a normal color. May be good. For example, among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, the active display when the jackpot expectation is low, such as the active display using any of the display images AKE0 to AKE2, is when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is executed. In addition, it may be displayed in a grayscale display color which is a special color. On the other hand, in the active display when the jackpot expectation is high, such as the active display using any of the display images AKE3 and AKE4 among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, a color change effect such as a monochrome change is executed. When present, it may be displayed in a red or gold display color, which is a normal color. This enhances the sense of unity of the color change effect and prevents the impression from being lowered, and also makes it easier for the player to see the active display with high expectation of big hits, so that the active display raises the player's expectation. Can be properly executed to improve the game entertainment.

11-5 and 11-6 show an execution example of an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N. Here, a plurality of production execution examples 05AK51 to 05AK56 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

The effect execution example 05AK51 shows a case where the step-up notice is executed during the period when the color change effect and the swing effect are not executed. In the production execution example 05AK51, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the outer frame partial image in the step-up notice. In this way, during the period when the color change effect and the swing effect are not executed, when the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice is executed, the game is played with the emission color according to a part or all of the effect modes in the notice effect. It suffices if a part or all of the effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light.

The effect execution example 05AK52 shows a case where both the swing effect and the step-up notice are executed during the period when the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 05AK52, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light in accordance with the basic color of the rocking background display 05AKG1 in the swinging effect. In this way, during the period when the color change effect is not executed, when a notice effect such as a swing effect and a step-up notice is executed, the emission color according to a part or all of the effect modes in the swing effect is used. It suffices if a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light.

The effect execution example 05AK53 shows a case where both the monochrome change and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed during the period when the swing effect is not executed. In the production execution example 05AK53, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit silver in accordance with the monochrome change in the color change production. In this way, during the period in which both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the notice effect such as the step-up notice are executed, when the swing effect is not executed, the monochrome change effect mode in the color change effect is matched. It suffices if a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light depending on the emission color.

The effect execution example 05AK54 shows a case where the monochrome change, the swing effect, and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed together. In the effect execution example 05AK54, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light in accordance with the basic color of the rocking background display 05AKG1 in the rocking effect. In this way, during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect, the swing effect, and the step-up notice are both executed, the game effect lamp 9 is provided with the emission color corresponding to a part or all of the effect modes in the swing effect. It suffices if part or all of it can be made to emit light.

The effect execution example 05AK55 shows a case where both the golden system change and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed during the period when the swing effect is not executed. In the production execution example 05AK55, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit gold in accordance with the change in the golden system in the color change production. In this way, during the period in which both the golden system change in the color change effect and the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice are executed, when the swing effect is not executed, the effect mode of the golden system change in the color change effect. It suffices if a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light according to the emission color according to the above.

The effect execution example 05AK56 shows a case where the golden system change, the swing effect, and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed together. In the production execution example 05AK56, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit gold in accordance with the change in the golden system in the color change production. In this way, during the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect, the swing effect, and the notice effect such as the step-up notice are executed together, the color is similar to the effect execution example 05AK56 in which the swing effect is not executed. It suffices if a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light by a light emitting color that matches the effect mode of the golden system change in the change effect.

FIG. 11-6 (C) shows a light emission priority setting example 05AKY1 in the case of executing the effect of the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. The light emission priority is used to determine a light emission mode such as a light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 during a period in which a plurality of effects are executed at the same time. In the period in which the plurality of effects are executed together, the light emission mode including the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the effect having a high light emission priority instead of the effect having a low light emission priority.

As shown in the production execution examples 05AK51 to 05AK56, the light emission priority has the highest golden system change in the color change production, and decreases as the monochrome change in the swing effect and the color change effect, and a step-up notice, etc. Other notice effects are the lowest. Therefore, as shown in the effect execution examples 05AK53 and 05AK55, the color change of the game effect lamp 9 is performed when both the monochrome change and the golden system change in the color change effect and the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice are executed. It emits light in a light emitting color such as silver or gold corresponding to the production. As a result, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the color change effect and prevent the impression from being lowered. Further, as shown in the effect execution example 05AK54, when the monochrome change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 is set to a light emitting color such as blue corresponding to the rocking effect. Make it emit light. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the rocking effect, and it is possible to prevent the impression of the rocking effect from being lowered. In this way, the game entertainment can be improved by the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 that prevents the impression of the color change effect and the swing effect from being lowered.

When the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, it is determined that the control is controlled to the jackpot game state, which is a highly expected effect mode in which the player is controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, as shown in the effect execution example 05AK56, when the golden system change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 is changed to the golden color corresponding to the golden system change in the color change effect. Make it emit light with a luminescent color such as. In this way, when both the color change effect with high expectation of big hits such as the golden system change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light with the emission color corresponding to the color change performance. You may let me. As a result, the game entertainment can be improved by the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 that raises the expectation of the player. In addition, when the golden system change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a light emitting color such as blue corresponding to the swing effect. In this case, the player can easily recognize the rocking effect, and the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 that prevents the impression of the rocking effect from being lowered can improve the game entertainment.

When the effect modes in the plurality of effects executed at the same time are different, the light emission priority of the game effect lamp 9 may be set to be different. For example, when the number of steps in the step-up notice is "2" or less, the light emission priority is lower than in the case of monochrome change in the color change effect. On the other hand, when the number of steps in the step-up notice is "3" or more, the light emission priority may be higher than in the case of the monochrome change in the color change effect. When any effect mode in the swing effect is different, the light emission priority is lower than in the case of monochrome change in the color change effect, or higher than in the case of the golden system change in the color change effect. May include the case where

FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step AKS013 of FIG. 10-11 as the advance notice effect determination process. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-7, the notice during all symbol changes is determined in the same manner as in the case shown in FIG. 10-13 (steps 77AKS31 to 77AKS33). Subsequently, unlike the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the presence / absence of the swing effect and the pattern are determined (step 05AKS01). The rocking effect pattern is also referred to as a rocking effect pattern. In step 05AKS01, it is determined to be either "without effect" in which the swing effect is not executed or "with effect" in which the swing effect is executed. Then, when it is determined that "with effect" is to execute the swing effect, it is determined to be one of a plurality of swing effect patterns prepared in advance. Then, as in the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the notice after the reach is established is determined (steps 77AKS34 to 77AKS39).

FIG. 11-8 (A) shows a setting example 05AKP1 of a swing effect pattern. In the setting example 05AKP1, as a plurality of rocking effect patterns, the rocking effect patterns 05PA01 to 05PA04 and 05PA11 to 05PA14 in which some or all of the plurality of types of effect modes such as the rocking period, the number of rocking times, and the effect display are different. Is prepared in advance. The swing period specifies the effect period for executing the swing effect. The number of swings specifies the number of times the screen display is shaken by the swing effect. For the effect display, the display color of the effect display 05AKG3, which is used for the rocking effect, is specified. In addition, a plurality of swing effect patterns having different arbitrary effect modes such as swing angle, screen display size, swing direction, and swing speed may be prepared.

In the swing effect pattern 05PA01, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA02, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA03, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA04, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA11, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a golden effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA12, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a golden effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA13, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a golden effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA14, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a golden effect mode.

FIG. 11-8 (B) shows a determination example 05AKD1 in the case of determining the presence / absence of the swing effect. In step 05AKS01, for example, using a random value for determining the swing effect, the swing effect determination table is referred to, and a determination result to which a determination value matching the random value is assigned is determined according to the variable display result. As a result, the presence or absence of the swing effect, which is whether or not to execute the swing effect, may be determined. In the determination example 05AKD1, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined to be "with effect" to execute the swing effect at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "loss". With such a setting, when the rocking effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the rocking effect is not executed.

FIG. 11-8 (C) shows a determination example 05AKD2 of the swing effect pattern. In step 05AKS01, when it is determined that "with effect" is to execute the swing effect, for example, using a random value for determining the swing effect pattern, the swing effect pattern determination table is referred to, and the color change effect or variable The swing effect pattern may be determined by determining the determination result to which the determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the display result. In the determination example 05AKD2, it is determined to be one of the swing effect patterns 05AP01 to 05AP04 in the case of "None" in which the color change effect is not executed, or in the case of executing the monochrome change in the color change effect. In each of the swing effect patterns 05AP01 to 05AP04, the effect display includes a rainbow-colored effect mode. Therefore, when the swing effect is executed during the period when the color change effect is not executed or the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the display color of the effect display 05AKG3 becomes rainbow color. In the determination example 05AKD2, when the golden system change in the color change effect is executed, it is determined to be one of the swing effect patterns 05AP11 to 05AP14. The rocking effect patterns 05AP11 to 05AP14 all include an effect mode in which the effect display is gold. Therefore, the display color of the effect display 05AKG3 becomes gold when the swing effect is executed during the period in which the golden system change in the color change effect is executed.

The rocking effect pattern may be determined so that the jackpot expectation is different according to any effect mode in the rocking effect. For example, the shape of a part or all of the rocking background display 05AKG1, the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, the effect display 05AKG3, and any other effect image displayed when the rocking effect is executed. When either the color or the pattern is different, the determination rate of the swing effect pattern may be set so that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different.

Depending on whether the color change effect is executed or not, the color change effect being executed is a monochrome change, or the color change effect is a golden change, a part of the effect mode in the swing effect or It may be possible to determine the swing effect pattern so that all are different. The effect mode in the swing effect is the same depending on whether the color change effect is executed or not, the color change effect being executed is a monochrome change, or the color change effect is a golden change. It may be possible to determine the swing effect pattern so that there are cases where the effect mode in the rocking effect is partially or completely different. The effect mode in the swing effect is the same depending on whether the color change effect is executed or not, the color change effect being executed is a monochrome change, or the color change effect is a golden change. The determination rate of the swing effect pattern may be set so that the ratios are different. The effect mode in the swing effect is the same depending on whether the color change effect is executed or not, the color change effect being executed is a monochrome change, or the color change effect is a golden change. The determination rate of the rocking effect pattern may be set so that the jackpot expectation of the rocking effect pattern is different.

After such a swing effect pattern is determined, the variable display during effect process is executed in step S172 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, so that the swing effect can be executed. In the variable display during effect processing, for example, when it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not the swing effect period is reached. The rocking effect period may be set as long as it can be set according to the rocking effect pattern. Then, in the case of the swing effect period, the control for executing the swing effect is performed. At this time, the display control for executing the swing effect is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU 77AK 131 to the VDP 77AK 132. In this way, it suffices if the swing effect can be executed during the period during which the variable display is being executed. When the swing effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays, the display control may be performed so that the swing effect is continuously executed even after the variable display ends.

FIG. 11-9 shows a control example of the timing at which the execution of the color change effect and the swing effect is started and the timing at which the execution is ended. The oscillating effect can be started at the timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, the execution of the swing effect ends at the timing when the effect time corresponding to the swing period of the swing effect pattern elapses. The timing of starting the execution of the swing effect is not limited to the timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation, and may be an arbitrary timing set in advance during the period in which the variable display is executed.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a control example 05AKC01 when the swing effect is executed during the period when the color change effect is executed. In the control example 05AKC01, when the variable display that is the target variation of the color change effect is started, the execution of the swing effect is started. Then, if the rocking period according to the rocking effect pattern is 3 seconds, the rocking effect is executed in the effect period TD1. If the rocking period according to the rocking effect pattern is 5 seconds, the rocking effect is executed in the effect period TD2. Both the production periods TD1 and TD2 are set to end at a timing before the reach is established. The color change effect ends at the timing T02 provided after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode in the variable display in which the target changes. Therefore, since the color change effect does not end during the period when the swing effect is executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect, is not restored from the special color to the normal color. .. The color change effect may have a limit as a limit that defines a range of the period during which the swing effect is executed, does not end in this range, and does not return from the special color to the normal color. In this way, when both the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the screen display in the specific area is not restored from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. As a result, the color change effect and the swing effect are appropriately executed so as to prevent the combination of the color change effect and the swing effect from giving a complicated impression to the player, and the game entertainment is improved. Can be done.

When both the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the screen display in the specific area may be restored from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. For example, the effect period of the swing effect can be set so as to continue until after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and when the execution of the color change effect ends at the timing T02, the rocking effect is performed. The dynamic effect may be continuously executed. In this case, the screen display in the specific area is restored from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. As a result, the color change effect and the rocking effect can be appropriately executed so as to enhance the impression of the rocking effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The rocking effect may be included in a specific effect executed after the reach is established, for example, a reach effect of super reach. In this case, the timing T02 at which the execution of the color change effect ends may be set so that it is after the reach is established and after the execution of the specific effect is completed. With this setting, the color change effect does not end during the period when the rocking effect is being executed, so the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be rocked by the rocking effect, is usually changed from the special color. Restrictions can be set so that the colors are not restored.

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows a control example 05AKC02 when the execution of the color change effect is started during the period during which the swing effect is executed. In the control example 05AKC02, when the variable display is started during the period when the color change effect is not executed, the execution of the swing effect is started. Then, if the rocking period according to the rocking effect pattern is 3 seconds, the rocking effect is executed in the effect period TD1. If the rocking period according to the rocking effect pattern is 5 seconds, the rocking effect is executed in the effect period TD2. The color change effect can be started at the timing when the game ball passes through the starting areas provided in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening as the starting winning is generated. When such timing T01 is included in the effect periods TD1 and TD2, the execution of the color change effect is started during the execution of the swing effect, and the display displayed in the specific area to be shaken by the swing effect. The screen display is changed from normal color to special color. In this way, when the swing effect is being executed, the color change effect can be executed so as to change the screen display from the normal color to the special color. As a result, the color change effect and the swing effect are appropriately executed so as to secure an opportunity to execute the color change effect based on the start prize and prevent the execution frequency of the color change effect from decreasing. , The game entertainment can be improved.

FIG. 11-10 shows a configuration example of an effect display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the swing effect is executed. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn by being divided into, for example, a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 11-10, layers 05FL to 05FL3 are provided as a plurality of display layers. A drawing area corresponding to each display layer may be secured in a frame buffer such as VRAM77AK145. The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 05FL3 is designated as the first drawing target. After that, the effect images arranged in each display layer may be designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 05FL2, 05FL1, and 05FL0. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 05FL to 05FL3, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 is included in the effect image constituting the decorative pattern-related screen. For example, the layer 05FL2 is an effect image showing a decorative pattern, an effect image used as a background image used for a normal background display, an effect image used for a notice effect such as a step-up notice, and a variable display serving as a second interface display area. Of the corresponding display area AKA2, the effect image used for the hold display in the first hold display unit AKB1 and the second hold display unit AKB2 is drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 is displayed in a special color different from the normal color by changing to a grayscale display color when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. At this time, by executing the color change synthesis process shown in FIG. 10-20, the color overlay for color change may be changed to a grayscale color different from the normal color. As described above, the layer 05FL2 is included in the monochrome change target that changes the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target to a color different from the usual one when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect.

The screen display to be oscillated by the oscillating effect may be updated before the oscillating effect is executed, and may be statically displayed during the oscillating effect. In this case, during the period during which the rocking effect is being executed, the drawing of the effect image on the layer 05FL2 is paused, and the effect image drawn when the execution of the rocking effect is started is captured and captured. Therefore, the effect image may be stopped so as not to be updated inside the swinging screen display.

Alternatively, the screen display to be rocked by the rocking effect may be updated while the rocking effect is being executed. In this case, during the period during which the swing effect is being executed, the drawing of the effect image on the layer 05FL2 is continuously executed, and the effect image can be updated to a different effect image from when the execution of the rocking effect is started. As a result, the effect image may be continuously updated inside the swinging screen display.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is included in the effect image constituting the outer frame of the screen. For example, on the layer 05FL1, the effect image used for the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 is drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is combined with the effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 to form a screen display to be shaken by the swing effect and a peripheral region of the edge portion. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is displayed in the peripheral region of the edge portion in the swinging screen display. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1, such as the effect image used for the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, may not be displayed during the period when the rocking effect is not executed. For example, the image display device 5 may not display the effect image. It may be displayed at a predetermined position such as a peripheral edge on the screen. By executing the oscillating display control according to the oscillating effect pattern, it is possible to execute the oscillating effect having a different effect mode.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3 is included in the effect image constituting the rocking background. For example, on the layer 05FL3, the effect image used for the rocking background display 05AKG1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3 is displayed in a special area outside the screen display to be oscillated, unlike the effect image constituting the screen display to be oscillated by the oscillating effect. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3, such as the effect image used for the rocking background display 05AKG1, may not be displayed during the period when the rocking effect is not executed.

The layer 05FL0 is used for an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area AKA1 serving as the first interface display area and for active display in the active display unit AKB0 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area. The effect image, the effect image used for the effect display 05AKG3, and the like are drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL0 is different from the effect image constituting the screen display that is shaken by the swing effect, and is used for the effect display 05AKG3 that straddles the swing screen display and the special area or the peripheral area. Contains images.

The drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the plurality of display layers is executed, and the display image 05LX1 including the effect images corresponding to the plurality of effect displays is generated. The effect image used for the active display may be drawn on a separate layer having a higher display priority than the layer 05FL0. Alternatively, the effect image used for the active display may have a different display layer to be drawn depending on whether the jackpot expectation is low or the jackpot expectation is high. For example, among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, the effect image used for the active display when the jackpot expectation is low, such as the active display using any of the display images AKE0 to AKE2, has the same display priority as the layer 05FL2. It is drawn on the layer to have, and the color may be changed by the overlay for color change. On the other hand, among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, the effect image used for the active display when the big hit expectation is high, such as the active display using either the display images AKE3 or AKE4, has the same display priority as the layer 05FL0. It may be controlled so that the color does not change when the image is drawn on a layer having a display priority higher than the degree or the layer 05FL0 and the color change effect is executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 05AK)
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute special effects that change multiple effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. The swing effect is provided with a special effect execution means and a swing effect execution means capable of performing a swing effect that swings a specific area in which a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed. The special area outside the specific area to be swung becomes visible, and when both the special effect and the rocking effect are executed, the display displayed in the specific area is displayed in a special color and displayed in the special area. The display is displayed in normal colors. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The rocking effect executing means may be, for example, a CPU 77AK131 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 based on step 05AKS01. The special region may be, for example, a rocking background display 05AKG1 or the like. Displaying the special area in normal colors may be, for example, production execution examples 05AK12, 05AK22, and the like.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect to improve the game entertainment.

Alternatively, a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and executes a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. It is provided with a possible special effect executing means and a rocking effect executing means capable of rocking a specific area in which a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed. In, the peripheral region of the edge in the specific region to be swung becomes visible, and when both the special effect and the swing effect are executed, the display displayed in the specific region is displayed in a special color and is displayed in the peripheral region. The displayed display is displayed in normal colors. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The rocking effect executing means may be, for example, a CPU 77AK131 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 based on step 05AKS01. The peripheral region may be, for example, the outer frame display 05AKG2 when swinging. Displaying the peripheral region in normal colors may be, for example, production execution examples 05AK12, 05AK22, and the like.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect to improve the game entertainment.

It is provided with a hold storage means for storing information related to variable display as hold storage, a hold display means for holding hold display corresponding to hold storage, and a specific display means for performing specific display corresponding to a running variable display. When the display is started, the specific display can be executed by the mode related to the hold display corresponding to the variable display, and when the special effect is executed, the hold display is displayed in a special color and the specific display is usually displayed. It may be displayed by color. Here, the hold storage means may be, for example, the hold display data storage unit AKM1 or the like. The hold display means may be, for example, a first hold display unit AKB1, a second hold display unit AKB2, or the like. The specific display means may be, for example, the active display unit AKB0. The mode related to the hold display may be, for example, the same shape as the hold display. The colors of the hold display and the specific display may be, for example, in the case of the effect execution examples 05AK31 and 05AK32.
In such a configuration, the hold display and the specific display can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When the swing effect is executed, the effect display that straddles the specific area and the special area or the peripheral area can be executed, and when both the special effect and the swing effect are executed, the effect display is normally displayed. It may be displayed by color. Here, the effect display may be, for example, the effect display 05AKG3. Displaying the effect display in normal colors may be performed in the case of, for example, the effect execution example 05AK12.
In such a configuration, the game entertainment can be improved by displaying an appropriate effect.

It is equipped with a light emitting means that produces an effect by emitting light, and when both a special effect and a notice effect are executed, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a light emitting color corresponding to the special effect, and both the special effect and the rocking effect are executed. Occasionally, the light emitting means may be made to emit light in a light emitting color corresponding to the swing effect. Here, the light emitting means may be, for example, a game effect lamp 9. The emission color corresponding to the special effect may be, for example, silver. The emission color corresponding to the rocking effect may be, for example, blue.
In such a configuration, the game entertainment can be improved by the appropriate emission color.

When both the special effect and the swing effect are executed, it is not necessary to restore the display displayed in the specific area from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. For example, the case of control example 05AKC01 may be used.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the swing effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

When the rocking effect is being executed, the special effect may be executed so as to change the display displayed in the specific area from the normal color to the special color. For example, the case of control example 05AKC02 may be used.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the swing effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

The special effect executing means can execute a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period into a common color in the first period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the starting area. In the first period, when the special effect and the specific effect are executed together, the specific effect suggesting that the specific effect is controlled in an advantageous state is provided with the specific effect execution means that can be executed in the second period. And the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect with normal colors in the second period that does not overlap with the first period, and performs the specific effect in the second period that overlaps with the first period. It may be executed by the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color, and a part of the specific effect may be executed in a common effect mode depending on whether it is a normal color or a special color. .. Here, the starting region may be, for example, a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Executing the specific effect with normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Executing the specific effect with a special color may be performed, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden system change due to the color change effect. A part of the specific effect may be, for example, an audio effect that outputs the music phrases PHA1 and PHA2.
In such a configuration, attention can be paid to a special effect and a specific effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Explanation of feature part 06AK)
With respect to the feature unit 06AK, the color recovery effect is executed when the execution of the color change effect is completed. The color recovery effect is an effect of changing a plurality of effect displays that have been changed to special colors by a color change effect so as to return to normal colors. For example, when the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect is completed, the plurality of effect displays changed to the grayscale display color, which is a special color, are changed to return to the normal display color, which is the normal color. The color recovery effect to be made is executed. In addition, when the execution of the golden system change in the color change effect is completed, the plurality of effect displays changed to the gold color system display color, which is a special color, are returned to the normal display color, which is the normal color. A changing color recovery effect is executed.

FIG. 11-11 shows, as a first execution example of the color recovery effect relating to the feature unit 06AK, a case where the display area of the normal color can be changed in order from a part of the plurality of effect displays. The color recovery effect of changing from a part of the plurality of effect displays in a manner of sequentially expanding the display area of the normal color includes a plurality of types of effect contents having different positions at which the change to the normal color is started. FIG. 11-11 shows production execution examples 06AK01 to 06AK03 in the case where the change to the normal color starts from the center position of the screen display at the center of the screen. In addition to the case where the color recovery effect starts at the center of the screen, for example, there are cases where the screen starts from the right side of the screen display and starts from the left side of the screen, and cases where the color recovery effect starts from the left side of the screen display. , It suffices if there are multiple types of production contents with different start positions. The color recovery effect is not limited to the start of the center of the screen, the start of the right side of the screen, and the start of the left side of the screen.

In the effect execution example 06AK01, due to the monochrome change in the color change effect, a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed in grayscale display colors which are special colors, and then radial at the center position of the screen display. The change to return to normal color has started. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK02, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK01, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. Further, in the effect execution example 06AK03, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK02, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. In this way, in the mode of expanding the display area of the normal color, the range of return to the normal color is expanded so as to gradually increase from a part of the screen display to the whole, thereby changing the color change effect. The display colors of the plurality of effect displays may be gradually changed from the special colors to the normal colors.

The color restoration effect of changing from a part of a plurality of effect displays in a manner of gradually expanding the display area of the normal color is not limited to the one that expands so as to increase the return range to the normal color, for example, special. In a manner of narrowing the display area of colors, the display range of special colors may be reduced so as to be reduced. As an example of a color restoration effect that reduces the display range by special colors, the restoration to normal colors is started from the peripheral area that is the edge of the screen display, and it is directed toward the center position of the screen display as time passes. As the normal color restoration progresses, the display range due to the special color may be reduced. In addition, as the range of returning from the special color to the normal color progresses in any direction such as up, down, left, or right, it is sufficient that all of the plurality of effect displays can be returned to the normal color in order.

In FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, as a second execution example of the color recovery effect for the feature unit 06AK, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change effect is displayed, and a plurality of effect displays are displayed. It shows the case where the color can be changed to normal. An effect image showing the character is displayed as a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change effect. A color recovery effect that displays a special image and changes a plurality of effect displays into normal colors includes a plurality of types of effect contents in which characters displayed as special images are different. Further, the color recovery effect of displaying a special image and returning a plurality of effect displays to the normal color includes a plurality of types of effect contents having different methods for changing to the normal color. The method of changing to a normal color may include, for example, an effect display and an increase in the recovery range. The effect display is a method in which an effect image that is an effect image corresponding to the operation of the character display is displayed, the entire screen display is covered, and then a plurality of effect displays are changed to normal colors. The recovery range increase is a method of changing a plurality of effect displays to normal colors from the start position corresponding to the character display operation.

FIG. 11-12 shows production execution examples 06AK11 to 06AK13 in the case where the character 06CA is displayed as an effect image showing the character to be a special image and the color is changed to the normal color by the effect display. In the effect execution example 06AK11, the character 06CA is displayed, and the effect display is started at the display position corresponding to the character display operation. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK12, the display size of the effect display is enlarged so as to be larger than that of the effect execution example 06AK11. Further, in the effect execution example 06AK13, the display size of the effect display is enlarged so as to be larger than that of the effect execution example 06AK12. In the range of the effect display, the screen display is covered and the display of the effect image becomes invisible. However, a display having a high display priority, such as a small symbol display or an active display, may be displayed so as to be visible without being covered by the effect display. After such an effect display covers the entire screen display, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect change from the special color to the normal color as the effect display is erased. Just do it. In this way, after displaying the effect image showing the character to be the special image, the effect display covering the plurality of effect displays is executed, and then the plurality of effect displays can be changed to return to the normal colors.

FIG. 11-13 shows production execution examples 06AK14 to 06AK16 in the case where the character 06CB is displayed as an effect image showing the character to be a special image and the color is changed to the normal color due to the increase in the recovery range. In the effect execution example 06AK14, the character 06CB is displayed, and the change to return to the normal color is started at the start position corresponding to the operation of the character display. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK15, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK14, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. Further, in the effect execution example 06AK16, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK15, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. In this way, in the mode of expanding the display area of the normal color, the change from the start position to the normal color due to the operation of the character display is started, and the return range to the normal color is in order from a part of the screen display. By enlarging each of them so as to increase to all, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect may be changed so as to return from the special color to the normal color.

FIG. 11-14 shows a case where all of the plurality of effect displays can be gradually changed to normal colors as a third execution example of the color recovery effect relating to the feature unit 06AK. The color recovery effect, which gradually changes all of the multiple effect displays to normal colors, changes from grayscale or golden display colors to display colors that become normal colors over time, for example, by image processing of color blends. The content of the effect may be changed so as to restore the entire screen display. FIG. 11-14 shows an effect execution example 06AK21 to 06AK23 in the case where a plurality of effect displays changed to grayscale display colors due to a monochrome change in the color change effect are changed so as to gradually return to normal colors. There is.

In the production execution example 06AK21, the display color, which is the normal color, is color-blended at a ratio of, for example, 25% with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change, so that all of the plurality of production displays are converted to the normal color. The return change has begun. After that, in the production execution example 06AK22, the display color that becomes the normal color is color-blended at a ratio of, for example, 50% with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change, so that the change that returns to the normal color is obtained. It is more advanced than the production execution example 06AK21. Further, in the production execution example 06AK23, the display color which is the normal color is color-blended with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change at a ratio of, for example, 75%, so that the change to return to the normal color is obtained. It is more advanced than the production execution example 06AK22. The ratio of the display color, which is a normal color, to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change may be changed discretely or continuously according to the passage of the production time in the color recovery effect. May be changed.

After changing the multiple effect displays displayed at the same time from the normal color to the common special color by the color change effect, there was room for improvement in the effect of changing to return to the normal color. Therefore, in the first execution example of the color recovery effect relating to the feature unit 06AK, it is possible to change the display area of the normal color in order from a part of the plurality of effect displays. Further, in the second execution example of the color restoration effect relating to the feature unit 06AK, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change effect can be displayed, and a plurality of effect displays can be changed to normal colors. Further, in the third execution example of the color restoration effect relating to the feature unit 06AK, all of the plurality of effect displays can be gradually changed to normal colors. By making these color restoration effects feasible, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the effects of returning to normal colors and improve the interest of the game. The color recovery effect related to the feature unit 06AK is not limited to the one in which all of the first to third execution examples can be executed, and a part of the first to third execution examples can be executed. It may be the one that is.

With respect to the feature unit 06AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the display color while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. For example, in the notice after the reach is established, the message display color notice corresponding to the notice type of "display color notice" can be executed at a predetermined ratio. When the execution of the color change effect is completed, the plurality of effect displays are changed from the special color to the normal color according to the execution of the color recovery effect. When such a color recovery effect and a notice effect such as a message display color notice are executed together, the display color of the notice effect becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses.

FIG. 11-15 shows a case where the color recovery effect and the message display color notice are executed together with respect to the feature unit 06AK. In the variable display in which the target changes, the color change effect may end after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. When the execution of such a color change effect is completed, the color recovery effect is executed, and the message display color notice can be executed during the period in which the plurality of effect displays are changed from the special color to the normal color. be. FIG. 11-15 shows an effect execution example 06AK51 to 06AK53 in the case where the change for returning to the normal color is the start at the center of the screen starting from the center position of the screen display.

In the case of the effect execution example 06AK51, a change that returns to the normal color radially starts at the center position of the screen display. However, since the display area that is the return range to the normal color is narrow, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK52, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK51, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. As a result, the range in which the player can visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice is also increased, so that the display color of the notice effect can be easily recognized. Further, in the effect execution example 06AK53, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK52, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to be widened. In this way, the player can gradually visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice. Therefore, when the return range to the normal color is gradually increased from a part of the screen display to the entire screen display to expand the display area of the normal color, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect are displayed. , The special color may be changed to return to the normal color.

It should be noted that the color changed according to the color change effect is not limited to the case where the display area of the normal color is expanded so that the return range to the normal color increases from a part of the screen display to the whole in order. When it is possible to change multiple production displays to return to normal colors by displaying special images of different colors, or when all of the multiple production displays can be changed to gradually return to normal colors. However, when a notice effect such as a message display color notice is executed together, the display color of the notice effect may be visible as the color recovery effect progresses. In this way, by making the display color of the advance notice effect visible as the color recovery effect progresses, the color recovery effect and the advance notice effect are appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the advance notice effect. , The game entertainment can be improved.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step AKS013 of FIG. 10-11 as the advance notice effect determination process. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, as in the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the notice during all symbol changes is determined, and it is possible to determine whether or not the target change is the color change effect. (Steps 77AKS31 to 77AKS36). If the target variation of the color change effect is in step 77AKS36 (step 77AKS36; Yes), the type and pattern of the color recovery effect are determined (step 06AKS01). The pattern of the color recovery effect is also called a color recovery pattern. In step 06AKS01, it is determined to be one of the color recovery types 06PA to 06PC. The color recovery type 06PA corresponds to the color recovery effect of the first embodiment that can be changed in a manner in which the display area of the normal color is sequentially expanded from a part of the plurality of effect displays. The color recovery type 06PB corresponds to the color recovery effect of the second execution example in which a special image such as an effect image showing a character is displayed and a plurality of effect displays can be changed to normal colors. The color recovery type 06PC corresponds to the color recovery effect of the third embodiment in which all of the plurality of effect displays can be gradually changed to normal colors. Then, as in the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the advance notice is determined after the reach is established (steps 77AKS37 to 77AKS39).

FIG. 11-17 (A) shows a setting example 06AKP1 of a color recovery pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color recovery type 06PA. In the setting example 06AKP1, as a plurality of color recovery patterns, the color recovery patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04, 06PA11 to 06PA14, 06PA21 to 06PA24 are partially or completely different for a plurality of types of production modes such as start timing, production period, and production content. Is prepared in advance. The start timing specifies the timing at which the execution of the color change effect ends and the execution of the color recovery effect starts. The effect period specifies the period during which the color recovery effect is executed. For the effect content, specify one of the start of the center of the screen, the start of the right side of the screen, and the start of the left side of the screen. In addition, a plurality of color recovery patterns having different arbitrary production modes may be prepared corresponding to the color recovery type 06PA.

In the color recovery pattern 06PA01, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA02, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA03, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA04, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA11, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA12, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA13, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA14, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA21, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the left side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA22, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the left side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA23, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the left side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA24, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the left side of the screen.

FIG. 11-17 (B) shows a setting example 06AKP2 of a color recovery pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color recovery type 06PB. In the setting example 06AKP2, as a plurality of color recovery patterns, color recovery patterns 06PB01 to 06PB04 in which some or all of the plurality of types of production modes such as the start timing, the production period, and the production content are different are prepared in advance. The start timing and the effect period are the same as in the case of the color recovery type 06PA. As the effect content, a method of changing to an effect image showing a character and a normal color is specified. In addition, a plurality of color recovery patterns having different arbitrary production modes may be prepared corresponding to the color recovery type 06PB.

In the color recovery pattern 06PB01, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the character 06CA and the effect display mode. In the color recovery pattern 06PB02, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the character 06CA and the effect mode of increasing the recovery range. In the color recovery pattern 06PB03, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the character 06CB and the effect display mode. In the color recovery pattern 06PB04, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the character 06CB and the effect mode of increasing the recovery range.

FIG. 11-17 (C) shows a setting example 06AKP3 of a color recovery pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color recovery type 06PC. In the setting example 06AKP3, as a plurality of color recovery patterns, color recovery patterns 06PC01 to 06PC04 in which some or all of the plurality of types of production modes such as the start timing and the production period are different are prepared in advance. The color recovery patterns 06PC01 to 06PC04 corresponding to the color recovery type 06PC may have a part of the effect mode in common in that the effect content is the same as the entire screen. A plurality of color recovery patterns having different arbitrary production modes may be prepared corresponding to the color recovery type 06PC.

The color recovery pattern 06PC01 has a start timing of timing T061 and an effect period of 3 seconds. The color recovery pattern 06PC02 has a start timing of timing T061 and an effect period of 5 seconds. The color recovery pattern 06PC03 has a start timing of timing T062 and an effect period of 3 seconds. The color recovery pattern 06PC04 has a start timing of timing T062 and an effect period of 5 seconds.

FIG. 11-18 shows a determination example 06AKD1 when determining the type of color recovery effect. In step 06AKS01 of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, for example, using a random number value for determining the color recovery type, the color recovery type determination table is referred to, and the random value matches according to the variable display result. The color recovery type, which is the type of the color recovery effect, may be determined by determining the decision result to which the decision value to be performed is assigned. In the determination example 06AKD1, the determination rate of the color recovery type differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination rate of the color recovery type 06PA is the highest, whereas when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of the color recovery type 06PC is high. highest. With such a setting, when the color recovery effect corresponding to the color recovery type 06PC is executed, the jackpot expectation is high. In this way, the jackpot expectation differs between the case where the color recovery type is the first type and the case where the color recovery type is the second type, so that the player's attention to the color recovery effect can be increased and the game interest can be improved. can.

11-19 and 11-20 show an example of determining a color recovery pattern corresponding to the determination result of the color recovery type. FIG. 11-19 shows a determination example 06AKD2 in the case of determining a color recovery pattern corresponding to the color recovery type 06PA. FIG. 11-20 (A) shows a determination example 06AKD3 in the case of determining a color recovery pattern corresponding to the color recovery type 06PB. FIG. 11-20 (B) shows a determination example 06AKD4 in the case of determining a color recovery pattern corresponding to the color recovery type 06PC. In step 06AKS01 of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, for example, using a random number value for determining the color recovery pattern, the color recovery pattern determination table corresponding to the determination result of the color recovery type is referred to, and the color is changed. The color recovery pattern may be determined by determining the determination result to which the determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the effect or the variable display result. In the determination example 06AKD2 to 06AKD4, the determination rate of the color recovery pattern is determined when the variable display result is "missing" and "big hit" depending on whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden system change. Is different. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree according to the effect mode for each color recovery pattern differs depending on whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change. As a result, the player's attention to the color recovery effect is different depending on the production mode of the color recovery effect depending on whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden system change. The degree can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

The color recovery pattern may be determined so that the jackpot expectation is different according to any effect mode in the color recovery effect. For example, the effect content that can be set in common for the color recovery types 06PA to 06PC, the effect content that differs for each color recovery type 06PA to 06PC, and any other effect image that is displayed when the color recovery effect is executed. The color recovery pattern determination rate is set so that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the rate of control to the big hit game state is different when any of the shapes, colors, and patterns indicated by some or all of them are different. May be done.

For example, in the determination example 06AKD2 shown in FIG. 11-19, whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change, the variable display result is a “big hit” rather than a “loss”. In this case, the determination rate of the color recovery patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04 becomes high. Each of the color recovery patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04 includes the effect content of starting at the center of the screen. Therefore, when the change to return to the normal color due to the color recovery effect is the start at the center of the screen starting from the center position of the screen display, the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the start is on the right side of the screen or the start on the left side of the screen. The degree becomes high.

FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S172 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9 as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 06AK. The variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 11-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-15, except for steps 06AKS11 to 06AKS13. In the variable display in-effect processing shown in FIG. 11-21, it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 06AKS11). Then, when the color change effect is being produced (step 06AKS11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the color recovery effect period is in effect (step 06AKS12). The color recovery effect period may be set as long as it can be set according to the determination result of the color recovery pattern. In the case of the color recovery effect period (step 06AKS12; Yes), the control for executing the color recovery effect is performed (step 06AKS13). In step 06AKS13, the display control when the color recovery effect is executed is performed by the drawing command supplied by the CPU77AK131 to the VDP77AK132. The color recovery effect period is not limited to the period set during the color change effect, and may be a period set in response to the end of the color change effect, such as after the end of the color change effect.

FIG. 11-22 shows a control example 06AKC01 of the period and timing for executing the color recovery effect with the end of the color change effect. Regarding the feature unit 06AK, the color change effect ends when the special color returns to the normal color due to the color recovery effect in the variable display that is the target variation. The color recovery effect is started to be executed at any of the timings T061 and T062 according to the determination result of the color recovery pattern. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T061, if the effect period according to the color recovery pattern is 3 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD11. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T061, if the effect period according to the color recovery pattern is 5 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD12. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T062, if the effect period according to the color recovery pattern is 3 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD21. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T062, if the effect period according to the color recovery pattern is 5 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed at the period TD22. For example, the periods TD21 and TD22 include a notice effect period in which the notice is executed after the reach is established. Therefore, when the color recovery effect is executed in either the period TD21 or TD22, the color recovery effect and the message display color notice may be executed together, and the display color of the character image in the message display color notice may be executed. Will be gradually visible to the player. In this way, when a notice effect such as a message display color notice is executed, the display color of the notice effect becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses. As a result, the color recovery effect and the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the advance notice effect, and the game interest can be improved.

The notice effect that the display color becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses is not limited to the notice after the reach is established such as the message display color notice. It may be an arbitrary advance notice effect that can be executed during the period in which is being executed. A part or all of the periods TD11 and TD12 shown in FIGS. 11-22 may include a part or all of the notice effect period in which the notice is executed during the change of all symbols. When the color recovery effect is executed in either the period TD11 or TD12, the color recovery effect and the notice during all symbol changes are executed together.

After the special color returns to the normal color by the color recovery effect, it is possible to execute an arbitrary display color effect having a different jackpot expectation depending on the display color, such as a button effect included in the reach effect of Super Reach. May be good. Since such a display color effect is executed after returning to the normal color, the player can easily recognize the display color from the start of the effect. As a result, the color recovery effect and the display color effect can be appropriately executed so as to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

FIG. 11-23 shows an example of effect execution when the color recovery effect is executed and the golden system change in the color change effect is started with the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect. In this way, the effect of changing the color of the plurality of effect displays that are changed so as to return to the normal color by the color recovery effect is also called a re-change effect. For example, is "big hit" included in the winning determination result stored in the hold display data storage unit AKM1 when the variable display is started during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed? Judge whether or not. At this time, when the "big hit" is included, the presence or absence of the re-change effect is determined. Then, when it is determined that there is an effect to execute the re-change effect, the re-change type and the re-change pattern similar to the color recovery type and the color recovery pattern are determined. FIG. 11-23 shows an effect execution example 06AK101 to 06AK103 in the case where the re-change type is determined to be the same as the color recovery type 06PA and the re-change pattern is determined to be the same as the color recovery pattern 06PA01.

In the effect execution example 06AK101, due to the monochrome change in the color change effect, a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed in grayscale display colors that are special colors, and from the center position of the screen display. Radial changes are initiated that result in a return to normal color. Inside the return range that changes to return to the normal color, as a new color change effect, a re-change that changes the multiple effect displays to the golden display color, which is a special color, starts due to the change in the golden system. Has been done. After that, in the production execution example 06AK102, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the production execution example 06AK101, and the display area is expanded so as to widen the display area of the normal color. The range of re-change to color is also expanding to increase. Further, in the effect execution example 06AK103, the range of return to the normal color is increased as compared with the effect execution example 06AK102, and the display area is expanded so as to widen the display area of the normal color. The range of re-change to color is also expanding to increase. In this way, it may be possible to execute a re-change effect that changes the colors of the plurality of effect displays that are changed so as to return to the normal colors by the color recovery effect. As a result, the color change effect and the color recovery effect are appropriately executed so as to raise the player's attention to the re-change effect that combines the color change effect and the color recovery effect, and the game interest is improved. Can be done.

The re-change effect that can be executed with the execution of the color recovery effect changes from a part of the multiple effect displays in order so as to return all from the first special color to the normal color, and also a part of the multiple effect displays. It suffices if all of them can be changed from the normal color to the second special color in order. Alternatively, the re-change effect that can be executed with the execution of the color recovery effect displays a special image having a color different from the first special color, and changes a plurality of effect displays so as to return from the first special color to the normal color. At the same time, the plurality of effect displays may be changed from the normal color to the second special color. The re-change effect that can be executed with the execution of the color recovery effect changes all of the multiple effect displays step by step from the first special color to the normal color, and gradually changes all of the multiple effect displays. It may be possible to change from the normal color to the second special color.

The re-change effect is not limited to the one that is changed so as to return to the normal color by the color recovery effect and then is changed to the special color again, without returning from the first special color to the second special color to the normal color. It may be changed. For example, with the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect, the golden system change in the color change effect may be started instead of the execution of the color recovery effect. When executing such a re-change effect, it may be possible to change a part of the plurality of effect displays in order to expand the display area of the first special color to the second special color. When the re-change effect is executed, a special image having a color different from the first special color may be displayed, and a plurality of effect displays may be changed from the first special color to the second special color. When the re-change effect is executed, all of the plurality of effect displays may be able to be changed from the first special color to the second special color step by step.

FIG. 11-24 shows an effect execution example relating to a modification example when the color change effect is started. When the color change effect is started, an effect image serving as an effect image for the effect at the start of the change may be displayed. The effect display by displaying the effect image for the effect at the start of change is started from a predetermined position on the screen display, and the display range is increased so as to cover all of a plurality of effect displays in order. It should be increased in size. When the display size increases until the effect display when the color change effect is started covers all of the multiple effect displays in order, for example, a part or all of the cover range of the effect display is transparent. By the drawing process, it may be possible to visually display a plurality of effect displays on the screen display that a part or all of them are displayed in normal colors. Then, after the effect display covers the entire screen display, the effect display of the coverage range may be changed to be difficult to visually recognize, and then the effect display changed to a special color by the color change effect may be started. .. FIG. 11-24 shows the effect execution examples 06AKA1 to 06AKA4 when the effect display is started from the center position of the screen.

In the effect execution example 06AKA1, the effect display covering the effect display is started at the center position of the screen display. At this time, in the coverage range of the effect display, it can be visually recognized that the covered effect display is displayed in normal colors. In the effect execution example 06AKA2, the coverage range of the effect display is enlarged so as to be larger than that of the effect execution example 06AKA1. Since the coverage range of the effect display has not yet reached the entire screen display, it can be visually recognized that the covered effect display is displayed in normal colors. After that, in the effect execution example 06AKA3, the coverage range of the effect display reaches the entire screen display, and the covered effect display is changed so as to be difficult to see. Subsequently, in the effect execution example 06AKA4, the monochrome change in the color change effect is started with the end of the effect display. In this way, the color change effect may be started after covering the plurality of effect displays by the effect display. The effect display progresses so as to cover all of the plurality of effect displays in order, and it may be visible that the covered effect display is displayed in normal colors. After changing the effect display covered by the effect display so that it cannot be visually recognized, the execution of the color change effect may be started to change the effect display to a special color.

Whether or not to execute the color change effect that changes the normal color to the special color by the effect display may be determined based on the variable display result in the variable display being executed when the start prize is generated. For example, when the variable display result in the variable display during execution is "missing", it is determined that the color change effect of changing the normal color to the special color by the effect display can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, when the variable display result in the variable display during execution is "big hit", it is determined not to execute the color change effect that changes the normal color to the special color by the effect display. In this way, the limit is that the variable display result in the variable display during execution becomes a "big hit", the range controlled by the big hit game state is defined, and the color change effect that changes the normal color to the special color by the effect display is not executed. May be limited as. In addition, when executing an effect with a high expectation of big hit in the variable display during execution, the color change effect that changes the normal color to a special color by the effect display is not executed, or the execution rate of such a color change effect is set. Limitations may be set as limits, such as lowering. When the player's expectation for the jackpot game state is increased by these restrictions, the color change effect is appropriately executed so as to prevent the color change effect from interfering with other effects, and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

The color change effect, which changes the normal color to a special color by the effect display, changes the multiple effect displays from the normal color to the special color when the effect display covers a part or all of the multiple effect displays so as to be visible. You may. The effect display may be changed from the normal color to the special color when the effect display partially or wholly covered by the effect display can be visually recognized through the effect display as in the effect execution example 06AKA2.

When the execution of the color change effect is completed, the plurality of effect displays changed to the special colors may be returned to the normal colors without executing the color recovery effect. For example, when the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, the execution of the color change effect is immediately terminated, so that the plurality of effect displays changed to the special colors are returned to the normal colors. It should be noted that the execution of the color change effect may be terminated immediately when a specific advance notice effect such as the reach notice is executed, not limited to the time when the reach is established. After that, since the notice can be executed after the reach is established, the display color in the notice effect such as the message display color notice may be easily recognized by the player from the beginning of the notice effect. As a result, the color change effect and the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed so that the player can easily recognize the display color of the advance notice effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

When the execution of the color change effect is started, it may be possible to change a part of the plurality of effect displays in order from the normal color to the special color. When the execution of the color change effect is started, a special image having a color different from the special color may be displayed, and a plurality of effect displays may be changed from the normal color to the special color. When the execution of the color change effect is started, all of the plurality of effect displays may be gradually changed from the normal color to the special color.

In the production execution example 06AK11 to 06AK13 of the color recovery effect that returns to the normal color by the effect display shown in FIG. 11-12, a plurality of drawing processes for transmitting a part or all of the covering range by the effect display on the screen display. The effect display may be displayed so that it can be visually displayed that part or all of the display is displayed in a special color. Then, after the effect display covers the entire screen display, the effect display of the coverage range may be changed to be difficult to see once, and then the effect display restored to the normal color by the color recovery effect may be started. .. The color recovery effect that returns to the normal color by the effect display may change the multiple effect displays from the special color to the normal color when the effect display covers a part or all of the plurality of effect displays so as to be visible. .. When the effect display partially or wholly covered by the effect display can be visually recognized through the effect display as in the effect execution example 06AK12, the effect display may be returned from the special color to the normal color.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 06AK)
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and can execute special effects that change multiple effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. It is equipped with a special effect executing means and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect that changes a plurality of effect displays changed to a special color by a special effect into a normal color, and is one of a plurality of effect displays in the specific effect. It can be changed in a manner in which the display area of the normal color is gradually expanded from the part. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a color recovery effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU77AK131 that executes step 06AKS13. For example, the effect execution examples 06AK01 to 06AK03 may be used so that the display area of the normal color can be changed in order to increase the display area.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the specific effect to improve the game entertainment.

In the specific effect, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the special effect may be displayed, and a plurality of effect displays may be changed to normal colors. Here, the special image may be, for example, a production image of characters 06CA and 06CB. The fact that the color can be changed to the normal color may be the case of, for example, the production execution examples 06AK11 to 06AK16.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

In a specific effect, all of the plurality of effect displays may be gradually changed to normal colors. Here, the fact that the color can be changed to the normal color may be the case of, for example, the production execution example 06AK21 to 06AK23.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

It is equipped with a notice effect execution means that can execute a notice effect having different expectations controlled in an advantageous state according to the display color, and when both the specific effect and the notice effect are executed, the notice effect is produced according to the progress of the specific effect. The display color of may be visible. Here, the notice effect may be, for example, a display color notice. The advance notice effect executing means may be, for example, CPU77AK131 that executes step AKS033. The display color of the advance notice effect may be visible in the case of, for example, the effect execution examples 06AK51 to 06AK53.
In such a configuration, the specific effect and the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

In the specific effect, when the display area of the normal color is changed in order from a part of the plurality of effect displays, the return may be performed by one of the plurality of return modes. Here, the plurality of return modes may be, for example, the start timing may be timing T061 or T062, the effect period may be 3 seconds or 5 seconds, the effect content may be screen center start, screen right side start, screen left side start, or the like.
In such a configuration, the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

In the specific effect, after the effect display covering the plurality of effect displays is executed after displaying the special image, the plurality of effect displays may be changed to normal colors. Here, the effect display may be executed, for example, in the case of the effect execution example 06AK13.
In such a configuration, the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

A re-change effect execution means capable of executing a re-change effect that changes the color of a plurality of effect displays that are changed to normal colors by a specific effect may be provided. Here, the re-change effect may be, for example, in the case of the effect execution example 06AK101 to 06AK103. The re-change effect executing means may be, for example, CPU77AK131 that executes step 77AKS06.
In such a configuration, the specific effect and the re-change effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game entertainment.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 9 ... Game effect lamp 77AK100 ... Microprocessor for production control 77AK131 ... CPU
77AK132 ... VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special effect execution means that can execute a special effect that changes multiple effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to a common special color, and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of changing the plurality of effect displays changed to the special color by the special effect to the normal color is provided.
In the specific effect, a special image having a color different from the special color can be displayed, and the plurality of effect displays can be changed to the normal color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images